Vauxhall 2007 Vectra Technical data

VAUXHALL Vectra
Operation, Safety, Maintenance
-2
Data specific to your vehicle
Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it easily accessible.
This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate.
Fuel
Designation
Engine oil
Grade
Viscosity
Tyre inflation pressure
Tyre size
with up to 4 persons
with full load
Summer tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Winter tyres
Front
Rear
front
Rear
Weights
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight
–
EC kerb weight
=
Loading
-1
Your Vectra
Make use of the Owner's Manual:
Your vehicle represents an intelligent
synthesis of advanced technology,
outstanding safety, environmental
compatibility and economy.
z Its "In Brief" section will give you an initial
overview.
z The table of contents at the start of the
Owner’s Manual and in each individual
chapter will help you find your way.
z Its index will help you find what you
want.
z It will familiarise you with the
sophisticated technology.
z It will increase your pleasure in your
vehicle.
z It will help you to handle your vehicle
expertly.
It now lies with you to drive your vehicle
safely and to see it performs perfectly. This
Owner's Manual provides you with all the
necessary information to that end.
Make sure your passengers are aware of
the possible risk of accident and injury
which may result from improper use of the
vehicle.
You must always comply with the laws of
the country in which you are travelling.
These could differ from the information in
this Owner’s Manual.
The Owner's Manual should always be kept
in the vehicle: ready to hand in the glove
compartment.
The Owner’s Manual is designed to be
clearly laid-out and easily understood.
This symbol signifies:
6 Continue reading on next page.
3 The asterisk signifies equipment not
fitted to all vehicles (model variants,
engine options, models specific to one
country, optional equipment, Genuine
Vauxhall Parts and Accessories).
9 Warning
9 Warning is used to mark text
regarding possible risks of accident or
injury. Failure to follow the instructions
could lead to injury or loss of life. Inform
vehicle passengers accordingly.
Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as
points of reference or indicate some action
to be performed.
Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a
reaction or a second action to be
performed.
Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We
wish you many hours of pleasurable
driving.
Your Vauxhall Team
0
Contents
Commitment to customer
satisfaction:
Our aim: to keep you happy with your
vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers
offer first-class service at competitive
prices. Experienced, factory-trained
technicians work according to factory
instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can
supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALLAPPROVED PARTS, which have undergone
stringent quality and precision checks, and
of course useful and attractive
VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES.
Our name is your guarantee!
For details of the
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network,
please ring this number; 0845 090 2044
In Brief ....................................................... 2
Instruments ............................................. 34
Keys, doors,
bonnet ................................................ 62
Seats, Interior .......................................... 81
Safety systems ..................................... 106
Lighting ................................................. 128
Windows, Sun Roof ............................. 136
Climate control .................................... 142
Easytronic ............................................ 170
Automatic transmission ...................... 178
Driving hints ......................................... 186
Saving fuel,
Protecting the environment ............ 188
Fuel consumption,
fuel, refuelling .................................. 190
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 193
Drive Control Systems ......................... 198
Brakes .................................................... 210
Wheels, tyres ......................................... 214
Roof Racks,
Caravan and Trailer Towing .......... 220
Self-help ................................................ 229
If you have a problem ......................... 264
Maintenance,
Inspection System ............................ 266
Vehicle care .......................................... 278
Technical Data .................................... 282
Index ...................................................... 314
2
In Brief
In Brief
Key numbers,
code numbers
Remove key number from keys.
The key number is specified in the vehicle
documents and in the Car Pass 3.
Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: make
a note of the key identifier codes.
Electronic immobiliser, infotainment
system 3: The code numbers are specified
in the Car Pass.
Do not keep the Car Pass in the vehicle.
For key with retractable key blade 3, press
button to extend.
6 Further information – see pages 62, 63,
vehicle recommissioning – see page 277.
To unlock and open
the doors:
Press button q,
pull door handle
6 Door locks, child safety locks
– see page 77,
Electronic immobiliser – see page 63,
Keys – see page 62,
Radio remote control – see page 64,
programming unlocking mode
– see page 67,
Central locking system – see page 66,
Anti-theft locking system 3 – see page 66,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 74.
In Brief
Unlock luggage compartment
and open:
Press button q on the
remote control,
press button and
with the estate pull button
beneath the handle
To adjust front seats:
Pull handle,
slide seat,
release handle
6 Radio remote control – see page 64,
central locking – see page 66,
programming unlocking mode
– see page 67,
vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 74,
electrically operated tailgate 3
– see page 71.
6 Seat position – see page 81,
electrically adjustable front seats
– see page 84.
Never adjust the seat while driving. It could
move in an uncontrolled manner when the
handle is pulled.
9 Warning
Important: Do not sit nearer than 10
inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to
permit safe airbag deployment.
Adjust front seat backrests:
Turn handwheel
Move backrest to suit seating position.
Do not lean on seat backrest whilst
adjusting it.
6 Seat position – see page 81,
fold front passenger seat backrest
– see page 95,
electrically adjustable front seats
– see page 84.
3
4
In Brief
To adjust front seat lumbar
support 3 at front seats:
Operate lever
To adjust front seat height 3:
Operate lever on
outboard side of seat
To adjust front seat inclination 3:
Operate front lever on
outboard side of seat
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal
requirements.
Pump direction of the lever
Up:
Raises seat
Down:
Lowers seat
Pump direction of the handle
Up:
Inclines seat
Down:
Levels seat
Do not adjust driver’s seat whilst driving.
Do not adjust driver’s seat whilst driving.
6 Seat position – see page 81,
electrically adjustable front seats
– see page 84.
6 Seat position – see page 81,
electrically adjustable front seats
– see page 84.
Do not lean on seat backrest whilst
adjusting it.
6 Seat position – see page 81,
electrically adjustable front seats
– see page 84.
In Brief
Electric seat adjustment 3:
Operate switch on outboard side
of seat
1
Adjusting the longitudinal position
2
Adjusting the inclination
3
Height adjustment
4
Backrest adjustment
5
Lumbar support 3
Do not adjust driver’s seat whilst driving.
6 Seat position – see page 81,
electrically adjustable front seats
– see page 84.
To adjust thigh support 3
of the front sport seat 3:
Press button in recessed handle
centred in the lower half of the
adjustment cushion and
adjust the thigh support
Adjust thigh support to suit personal
requirements.
Do not adjust the thigh support whilst
driving.
5
To adjust head restraint height of
front and rear outboard seats 3:
Press button to release,
adjust height,
engage in position
6 Adjusting rear centre
head restraint – see page 82,
head restraint position – see page 82,
head restraint removal – see page 82.
6
In Brief
To adjust 3 head restraint
angle of front and rear outboard
seats 3:
Swivel bottom edge of head
restraint forward or rearward
6 Head restraint position – see page 82,
rear head restraints – see page 82.
Adjusting interior mirror:
Swivel mirror housing
To adjust exterior mirrors:
Four-way switch in driver’s door
Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing
to reduce dazzle at night.
If the outer mirror switch is pressed 1 the
four-way switch operates the driver and
front passenger mirrors 3, and if the inner
mirror switch is pressed 2 it only operates
the front passenger mirror.
6 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror
– see page 126.
With electric seat adjustment with memory
function 3:
If the interior mirror switch 2 is pressed the
exterior passenger mirror automatically
points at the rear tyres as a parking aid
when reverse gear is selected (not with
trailer attached) 3.
6 Further information, aspherical exterior
mirrors 3 – see page 126,
automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirrors
– see page 126,
heated exterior mirrors – see page 18,
electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 85.
In Brief
Swing in exterior mirror:
Manually: press lightly.
Electric 3 (both mirror switches must not be
latched into position):
Push four-way switch to the right: outside
rear view mirrors swivel in.
Push four-way to the left: outside rear view
mirrors swivel out.
The mirrors can be retracted from the
outside: Press button p on the remote
control approx. 1 second. The mirrors will
be extended the next time the vehicle is
unlocked.
Swivelling only allowed at speeds of up to
4 mph (7 km/h).
To engage seat belt:
Draw seat belt smoothly from
inertia reel, guide over shoulder
and engage in belt buckle
The belt must not be twisted at any point.
The lap belt must lie snugly against the
body. The backrest must not be tilted back
too far (recommended tilting angle
approx. 25°).
To release belt, press red button on belt
buckle.
6 Seat belts – see pages 106 to 110,
airbag systems 3 – see page 112,
seat position – see page 81.
7
To disengage steering column
lock:
To release the lock,
move the steering wheel slightly,
turn key to position 1
Positions:
0 = Ignition off
1 = Steering released, ignition off
2 = Ignition on,
with diesel engine: preheating
3 = Start
6 Starting – see page 21,
electronic immobiliser – see page 63,
remove key and lock steering wheel
– see page 22.
8
In Brief
In Brief
Page
11 Parking lamps, dipped beam ....... 128
Instrument illumination ................. 133
Fog tail lamp .................................. 130
Fog lamps 3 ................................... 130
Headlamp range adjustment 3 .... 129
Page
23 Heated seat (left) 3 and
seat climate control ...................... 145
Hazard warning lamps .................. 16
Parking distance sensor 3 ........... 204
Central information display for
time, date, outside temperature,
infotainment system 3
check control 3,
trip computer 3,
climate control system 3................. 42
12 Bonnet release lever ........................ 80
25 Fuse box ......................................... 246
Turn signal lamps ............................ 15
Headlamp flash,
Dipped and main beam .................. 14
Door-to-door light function 3 ....... 132
Parking lamps ............................... 132
Cruise control 3 .............................. 202
16 Steering wheel adjustment ............ 14
1
Page
Side air vents .................................. 144
2
Front passenger airbag ................ 112
3
Centre air vents ............................. 144
4
Infotainment system 3 ................... 59
5
6
9
13 Ignition lock with steering
wheel lock .......................................... 7
14 Accelerator pedal ......................... 186
15 Brake pedal ........................... 187, 210
17 Clutch pedal 3 ............................... 187
18 Right heated seat 3 and
Seat climate control 3 ................... 145
Vauxhall alarm system 3 ............... 74
Rear window blind 3 .................... 141
and
Electronic Stability Program 3 ..... 198
SPORT mode 3 ............................. 200
7
Remote control 3 for
infotainment system ........................ 60
8
Instruments ....................................... 34
9
Horn .................................................. 16
19 Ashtrays ......................................... 102
10 Windscreen wiper,
windscreen wash system,
headlamp wash system 3 and
rear window wash system 3 ........... 16
20 Stowage compartment 3
with AUX input 3 ............................ 60
21 Cigarette lighter 3 or socket ........ 101
22 Climate control .............................. 165
24 Glove compartment ............. 103, 134
10
In Brief
Control indicators
T
Winter programme of
automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3,
see pages 174, 182.
(
Door open 3,
see page 36.
j
Easytronic 3,
Start engine 3,
see page 171.
t
Bulb replacement 3,
see pages 36, 252.
s
Open luggage compartment,
see pages 36, 70.
Coolant temperature,
see pages 35, 41.
>
Fog lights 3,
see pages 36, 130.
8
Exterior lights,
see pages 35, 128.
C
1
Sport programme
of automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3,
see pages 173, 182.
r
O
Turn signal lights,
see pages 15, 34.
I
Engine oil pressure,
see page 34.
R
p
v
W
Brake system,
Clutch system,
see pages 35, 212, 272.
Alternator,
see page 35.
Airbag systems,
Belt tensioners,
see pages 108, 117.
Main beam,
see pages 14, 36.
Fog tail light,
see pages 36, 130.
r
Parking distance sensor 3,
Fault,
see page 204.
u
Continuous
Damping Control 3,
Fault,
see page 200.
X
Seat belt 3,
see page 36.
A
Engine electronics,
Immobiliser,
Transmission electronics 3,
Diesel fuel filter 3,
Fault,
see pages 37, 63, 196.
!
Preheating system 3,
Diesel particle filter 3,
see page 37.
H
Coolant fluid level,
see pages 37, 271.
u
Anti-lock brake system,
see page 213.
In Brief
p
Electro-hydraulic power assisted
steering,
Fault,
see page 37.
v
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP®Plus ) 3,
see page 198.
y
Seat occupancy recognition 3,
see page 118.
S
Engine oil level,
see pages 38, 268.
m
Cruise control 3,
see page 202.
Y
Fuel level,
see pages 38, 41, 229.
Z
Exhaust emission 3,
see pages 38, 195.
w
B
Tyre pressure monitoring
system 3,
see pages 38, 206.
Adaptive driving light
(Adaptive Forward
Lighting = AFL) 3,
Fault,
see pages 38, 131.
Lighting
Light switch,
Stalk positions,
see pages 14, 128,
7
8
9
Lights off,
AUTO
Automatic dipped beam
activation 3,
see page 129.
Parking lights,
Dipped beam, main beam.
>
Fog lights 3,
see pages 36, 130.
r
Fog tail light,
see pages 36, 130.
C
11
Main beam,
see page 14.
O
Turn signal lights,
see page 15.
k
Instrument illumination,
see page 133.
?
Headlight range adjustment 3,
see page 129.
c
Interior lighting,
see page 133.
a
Reading lights, front 3,
see page 133.
¨
Hazard warning lights,
see page 16.
12
In Brief
Climate control
x
Air flow,
see pages 147, 163.
Air distribution,
see pages 147, 162,
L
to head area via adjustable
air vents and to foot well,
M
to head area via
adjustable air vents
front and rear 3,
l
J
to the windscreen and
the front door windows,
to the windscreen, to the
front door windows and
to the footwell,
K
to foot well.
V
Demisting and defrosting 3,
see pages 152, 157, 161.
Ü
Heated rear window,
see page 145.
n
Air conditioning system 3,
see page 150.
4
Sun roof 3
ü
Air recirculation system 3,
see page 150.
Sun roof,
opening – see page 139.
d
A
Automatic control of fan
speed 3,
see page 159.
Sun roof,
closing – see page 139.
f
Sun roof,
comfort setting – see page 139.
AUTO
Automatic mode 3,
Climate control system,
see page 159.
e
Sun roof,
raising – see page 139.
ß
Heated seats 3,
see page 145.
A
b
Windscreen wiper
Stalk positions,
see page 16,
Driver’s seat with climate
control 3,
see page 146.
§
$
Off,
Remote control
of auxiliary heating/
ventilation 3,
see page 165.
%
&
Slow,
Timed interval wipe, or
automatic wipe
with rain sensor 3,
Fast .
In Brief
Information display,
Infotainment system 3
Information display,
see page 42.
Miscellaneous
p
Central locking system,
locking – see page 66.
q
Central locking system,
unlocking – see page 66.
r
Parking distance sensor 3,
see page 204.
SPORT
SPORT mode 3,
see page 200.
j
Horn,
see page 16.
T
Automatic transmission 3,
Easytronic 3,
Winter programme,
see pages 174, 182.
Ö
On button for date and time
and time, see page 44.
;
Date and time setting button,
See page 44.
r
Boot lid/tailgate,
unlocking – see page 70.
Remote control 3 for
infotainment system,
see page 60.
x
Luggage compartment,
unlocking – see page 70.
F
Electrically operated tailgate 3,
opening – see page 71.
j
Central locking switch,
unlocking,
see page 67.
Automatic transmission 3,
Selector lever lock,
see page 179.
+
First-aid kit (cushion) 3,
see page 234.
¨
Warning triangle 3:,
see page 234.
Cruise control 3
Buttons on turn signal stalk,
see page 202.
m
g
§
Activate, store,
accelerate,
Resume stored speed,
decelerate,
Deactivate.
m
)
Central locking switch,
locking,
see page 67.
Ä
Vauxhall alarm system 3,
see page 74.
z
Child safety switch 3,
see page 137.
N
Rear window blind 3,
see page 141.
13
14
In Brief
Steering wheel adjustment 3:
Move lever down,
adjust height and distance,
move lever up,
engage
Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
stationary and steering column lock is
released.
Light switch:
7
= Off
8
= Parking lights
9
= Dipped or
main beam
AUTO = Automatic
dipped beam
activation 3
6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 112.
Press > = Fog lights 3
Press r = Fog tail light
6 Further information – see page 128,
headlight warning device – see page 22.
Switch between
dipped and main beam:
Main beam = Push stalk
forward
Dipped beam = Push stalk
forward again
or pull toward
steering wheel
The blue control indicator C is illuminated
when main beam is on.
In Brief
Headlight flash:
Pull stalk towards steering wheel
Turn signals:
Right = Move stalk up
Left = Move stalk down
To operate cruise control 3:
Press buttons on stalk
After operation, the turn signal stalk
returns to its starting position.
Switch off: briefly press button §.
If the stalk is moved past the resistance
point, the turn signal light remains on.
When the steering wheel moves back
toward the straight-ahead position, the
turn signal light is automatically
deactivated.
Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point
and release to activate three flashes from
the turn signals when changing lanes or the
like.
If the stalk is moved past the resistance
point the turn signal remains on.
Switch the turn signal off manually by
moving the stalk slightly.
Switch on: briefly press button m.
Resume at stored speed: briefly press
button g.
6 Cruise control 3 – see page 202.
15
16
In Brief
Hazard warning lights:
On
= Press ¨
Off
= Press ¨ again
To operate horn:
Press j in middle of steering
wheel
To aid location of the pushbutton, the red
surface is illuminated when the ignition
switched on. When the button is pressed,
its control indicator flashes in time with the
hazard warning lights.
6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 112,
Remote control for
Infotainment system 3 – see page 60.
Windscreen wiper:
Gently tap stalk upward
§ = Off
$ = Adjustable timed
interval wipe
% = Slow
& = Fast
Stalk always moves back to starting
position. Shift to next higher or lower level:
move stalk slightly.
Push stalk past resistance point and hold:
the windscreen wiper stages are run
through; an acoustic signal sounds at
position §.
Adjustable interval wipe $:
Shorter intervals = turn adjuster wheel to
right
Longer intervals = turn adjuster wheel to
left
Press the stalk down from position §: Single
swipe.
6 Further information – see
pages 273, 274, 279.
In Brief
Automatic wiping with rain
sensor 3:
Move stalk upward
$ = automatic wiping
with rain sensor
Automatic wiping $: the rain sensor
detects the quantity of water on the
windscreen and automatically controls the
windscreen wiper. The sensitivity of the
system can be adjusted using the adjuster
wheel:
Automatic wiping $:
Less sensitive
= to the left
More sensitive
= to the right
To switch off, move stalk downwards.
6 Further information – see
pages 273, 274, 279.
Operating windscreen and
headlight wash systems 3:
Pull stalk towards steering wheel
The wiper is switched on for several wipe
operations. A single after-wipe occurs at
speeds of up to 80 mph (130 km/h).
The headlight wash system 3 is ready for
operation when the headlights are
switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the
headlights once. Then the headlight wash
system is disabled for 2 minutes.
On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep
the sensor area clean.
6 Further information – see
pages 274, 279.
17
Rear window wiper 3 and
wash system 3 operation:
Wiper on
= Push stalk
forward
Wiper off
= Push stalk
forward again
Wash
= Press and hold
The rear window wiper operates in
intermittent mode. Rear window wiping
takes place automatically with the
windscreen wiper switched on and reverse
gear selected.
When washing, the wiper swipes for a few
strokes. At low speeds, there is a one-time
post-wash swipe.
The rear window wash system is
deactivated when the fluid level is low.
6 Further information – see
pages 273, 274, 279.
18
In Brief
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors:
On = Press Ü
Off = Press Ü again
Heating operational only with engine
running.
The rear window and exterior mirror
heating is switched off automatically after
approx. 15 minutes.
6 Further information – see page 145.
To demist or defrost windows:
Set air distribution to l,
rotary switch for temperature
and air flow clockwise;
Air conditioning system 3:
Press buttons n and V,
climate control system 3:
Press buttons n and V,
turn rotary switch for
temperature clockwise,
air flow to A;
Climate control system 3:
Press button V
Open front air vents, direct side air vents
towards the door windows. Close centre air
vents 3.
6 Climate control – see page 142.
Setting automatic mode of
climate control system 3:
Press AUTO button,
set temperature for driver and
passenger sides using left and
right rotary knobs
All front air vents open. If desired, the rear
vents also 3.
6 Climate control system 3 – see
page 158.
In Brief
Range
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
23°
5
257 miles
21.3 miles/gal
Eco
x
Information display:
Display the information
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
19
Time,
outside temperature,
radio 3 and date,
navigation 3,
telephone 3,
check control 3,
trip computer 3,
climate control system 3.
6 Info Display – see page 42.
19:36
Manual transmission:
Reverse gear: with vehicle stationary, three
seconds after de-clutching, pull the ring up
and engage gear.
If the gear does not engage, set the lever in
neutral, release the clutch pedal and
depress again; then repeat gear selection.
Easytronic 3:
N
= Idle
o
= Drive position
+
= Higher gear
= Lower gear
A
= Change between
Automatic and
Manual mode
R
= Reverse
(with selector lever lock)
The selector lever must always be moved in
the appropriate direction as far as it will
go. Upon release, it automatically returns
to the centre position. Pay heed to the
gear/mode indicator in the transmission
display.
The foot brake must be depressed when
starting.
6 Easytronic 3 – see page 170.
20
In Brief
In order to leave P switch on ignition,
operate foot brake and press button on
selector lever.
To engage P or R, push button on selector
lever.
P: Only with vehicle stationary, first
apply hand brake
R: Only with vehicle stationary
6 Automatic transmission 3
– see page 178.
Automatic transmission 3:
P = Park position
R = Reverse gear
N = Neutral position (idling)
D = Automatic gear selection
Selector lever in D to the left:
Manual mode
+ = Higher gear or stage
= Lower gear
or stage
P or N must be engaged when starting.
Exhaust gases are poisonous
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is extremely poisonous but is
odourless and colourless.
Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and
never run the engine in an enclosed space.
Avoid driving with an open luggage
compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases
could penetrate the interior.
In Brief
21
Before starting off, check:
z Tyre pressure and condition
– see pages 206, 215, 299.
z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine
compartment – see pages 267 to 275.
z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting
and number plates are free from dirt,
snow and ice and operational.
z Do not place any objects in front of the
rear window, on the instrument panel or
in the area in which the airbags inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
correctly adjusted.
z Check brakes.
To start engine:
Operate clutch and brake,
automatic transmission 3 in P
or N,
Easytronic 3: Depress brake,
do not accelerate;
Petrol engine: Turn key to 3;
Diesel engine: Turn key to 2, when
control indicator ! goes out1),
turn key to 3;
Release key once engine is
running
To restart or switch off the engine, turn key
back to 0.
To switch on the ignition, only turn the key
to 2.
1)
Preheating system switches on only if outside
temperature is low.
Releasing the hand brake:
Raise lever slightly,
press lock button,
lower lever fully
To reduce operating forces, depress foot
brake at the same time.
And now "Have a good journey!"
Drive carefully, economically and with the
environment in mind. While driving, do not
do anything that could distract you.
22
In Brief
Warning buzzers
When starting the engine or whilst driving:
z if seat belt is not fastened 3,
z if a door or the tailgate is ajar,
z once you have reached a certain speed if
the hand brake is applied 3,
z if a specified maximum speed is
exceeded 3,
When the vehicle is parked and the driver’s
door is opened:
z When the key is in the starter switch 3,
z with parking lights or dipped beam
switched on
z with Easytronic 3 – if the hand brake is
not applied and no gear is engaged
when the engine is off
z for Easytronic 3 - if A, M or R is selected
while the engine is running and the
driver’s door is opened but the foot
brake is not depressed.
Parking the vehicle:
Apply handbrake firmly,
engine off,
remove key,
lock steering wheel,
lock vehicle
To lock and activate Vauxhall alarm
system 3 press button p. To activate the
anti-theft locking system 3 press button p
again.
6 Further information – see pages 63, 186,
radio remote control – see page 64,
central locking system – see page 66,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 74,
vehicle decommissioning – see page 277.
In Brief
Advice when parking:
z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable
surfaces, since the hot exhaust system
temperatures could cause the surface to
ignite.
z Closing windows and sun roof 3.
z Always apply the hand brake fully,
raising the armrest 3 when doing so.
When parking on an incline, pull the
hand brake as far as it will go. To reduce
operating forces, depress the foot brake
at the same time.
z Before switching off ignition: with
manual transmission, engage first or
reverse gear; with automatic
transmission 3, selector lever in P; with
Easytronic 3 engage first or reverse gear
(note gear indicator – see page 171).
z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control
indicator R flashes for a few seconds
after the ignition is switched off if the
hand brake has not been applied
– see page 175.
z In vehicles with automatic
transmission 3 the key can only be
removed when the selector lever is in
position P.
23
z Remove ignition key.
z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to
engage (anti-theft protection).
z The engine cooling fans may run after
the engine has been switched off
– see page 267.
6 Further information – see
pages 276, 277.
24
In Brief
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and
Accessories
Service work,
Maintenance
We recommend that you entrust all work to
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who
can provide you with reliable service and
correctly perform all work according to
factory instructions.
6 Vauxhall Service – see page 264,
service interval display – see
pages 39, 266.
We recommend that you use "Genuine
Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and
conversion parts approved expressly for
your vehicle type. These parts have
undergone special tests to establish their
reliability, safety and specific suitability for
Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous
market monitoring, we cannot assess or
guarantee these – attributes for other
products, even if they have been granted
approval by the relevant authorities – or in
some other form.
"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"
and conversion parts approved by
Vauxhall can be obtained from your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can –
also provide expert advice on permitted
technical changes – and ensure correct
installation.
9 Warning
Carry out regularly the checks
recommended in the individual sections
of this Owner’s Manual.
Ensure that your vehicle is serviced at the
service intervals specified in the Service
Booklet. We recommend that you entrust
this work to your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Have faults remedied without delay!
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If
necessary, interrupt your journey.
6 Maintenance – see page 266.
In Brief
25
That was the most important
information for your first drive in
your Vectra in brief.
The other pages of this chapter
contain a summary of the
interesting functions in your
vehicle.
The remaining chapters of the
Owner’s Manual contain
important information on
operation, safety and
maintenance as well as a
complete index.
26
In Brief
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system
The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system
comprises several individual systems.
Front airbag system
The front airbag system will be triggered in
the event of a serious accident involving a
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
Side airbag system 3
The side airbag system triggers when a
side-on collision occurs and provides a
safety barrier for the driver and/or
passenger in the respective front door
area. This reduces the risk of injury to the
upper body considerably in case of a side
impact.
Curtain airbag system 3
The curtain airbag system triggers in case
of a side-on collision and provides a safety
barrier in the head area on the respective
side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
injury to the head considerably in case of a
side-on collision.
6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 112.
In Brief
27
Active head restraints 3 at front
seats
Operating menus in the
information display 3
Selection using multifunction button: rotate
and press multifunction button.
In the event of a rear-end impact, the
active head restraints automatically tilt
forwards. The head is more effectively
supported by the head restraint and the
risk of injuries caused by whiplash in the
neck area is reduced.
Menu options are selected using menus
and using the buttons/four-way button or
the multifunction button of the
Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
The respective menu options are shown on
the display.
To exit a menu, turn the multifunction
button left or right to Return or Main and
select.
Active head restraints are identified by the
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint
guide sleeves.
Selection using four-way button:
press four-way button at top, bottom, left
or right.
6 Info Display – see page 42.
28
In Brief
Range
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on
steering wheel: rotate and press adjuster
wheel.
23°
5
257 miles
Coolant level
21.3 miles/gal
Eco
x
19:36
check
OK
Trip computer 3
Check control 3
The trip computers provide information on
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically.
The check control software monitors
Functions:
z Range
z Instantaneous consumption
z Distance travelled
z Average speed
z Effective consumption
z Average consumption
z Stop watch
z Tyre pressure 3
6 Trip computer – see pages 48, 54.
z Fluid levels
z Tyre pressure 3
z Radio remote control battery
z Vauxhall alarm system 3
z Important exterior lighting lights,
including cables and fuses
6 Check control – see page 58.
In Brief
Remote control for Infotainment
system 3
The functions of the Infotainment system 3
and the information display can be
operated using the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
instructions.
29
Twin Audio 3
Parking distance sensor 3
Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the
choice between the audio source played on
the infotainment system or a separate
audio source.
When reverse gear is selected, the parking
distance sensor switches itself on
automatically.
Only an audio source that is not currently
active on the infotainment system can be
controlled using Twin Audio.
Two headphone connections are available,
with separate volume controls.
Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
instructions.
The parking distance sensor can also be
activated at speeds of less than 15 mph
(25 km/h) by pressing the r button on
the instrument panel.
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to
the front or rear, an series of signals is
sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval
between the signals becomes shorter as
the distance is reduced. If the distance is
less than 30 cm, the signal will be
continuous.
6 Further information – see page 204.
30
In Brief
Travel Assistant 3
The Travel Assistant Contains
z
z
z
z
z
z
Armrest
Stowage compartments
Waste container
Drink holders
Accessory sockets
Connection console
e.g. for DVD player 3
z Electric cool box
z Tables
z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or
stowage compartment
The Travel Assistant is installed on a
console above the middle seat in the rear.
6 Further information – see page 87.
Tables
3
Fold table down.
1
Fold armrest up and and use recessed
grip to pull table upwards as far as it
will go.
4
Fold armrest down and set the table
to the desired position by sliding it
forward or rearward.
2
Swivel table forward.
In Brief
31
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
FlexOrganizer 3
SPORT mode 3
The side walls contain retaining strips,
where various components can be
attached to divide the luggage
compartment or fasten loads.
To activate
Press the SPORT button. The LED in the
button illuminates.
The system consists of
z variable partition net
z variable partition wall
z partition rod
z mesh pockets for the side walls
z hooks
6 Further information – see page 98.
SPORT mode is used to change
damping 3, steering 3, throttle
application and the shifting times and
shifting points for Easytronic 3 and
automatic transmission 3 while driving.
Damping and steering become more direct
and provide better contact with the road
surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
accelerator movements.
With Easytronic 3 and automatic
transmission 3, the shift times are
shortened and shifting takes place at
higher revs (not with cruise control
enabled 3).
6 Further information – see page 200.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system 3
The tyre pressure monitoring system
continuously monitors the pressure of all
four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.
A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel.
The inflation pressures of the individual
tyres are transmitted to a controller, where
they are compared.
The current tyre pressures can be
displayed on the graphical information
display or the colour information display 3.
Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in
the form of messages on the information
display whilst driving.
6 Further information – see page 206.
32
In Brief
Turn lighting 2
An additional light comes on at certain
steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°),
turn signal settings and speeds (up to
approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h).
The light beam projects at a 90° angle to
the left or right of the vehicle up to a
distance of approx. 30 metres.
Motorway lighting
At higher speeds and continuous straight
ahead travel, the dipped beam
automatically raises slightly, thereby
increasing headlight range.
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) 3
On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights,
improves illumination of
z curves (curve lighting)
z intersections and tight turns (turn
lighting)
Curve lighting 1
The Xenon light beam pivots based on
steering wheel position and speed (from
approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h).
The headlights shine at an angle of up to
15° to the right or left of the direction of
travel.
6 Further information – see page 131.
In Brief
33
z To close
– Press r on the remote control,
until the tailgate is closed
or
– with the key in the ignition
switch and the hand brake applied,
press button x in the driver’s door until
the tailgate is closed
or
– press button F in the tailgate.
6 Further information – see page 71.
Electrically operated tailgate 3
z To open
– Press button r on the remote control for
approx.
1 second
or
– with the key in the ignition
switch and the hand brake applied,
press x in the driver’s door approx.
1 second
or
– unlock the tailgate and open by pulling
the button under the handle.
Towing equipment with pivoting
coupling ball bar 3
The release lever is in the left stowage
compartment in the luggage
compartment. Open cover.
z Pull release lever downward
– The LED is illuminated as long as the
coupling ball bar is not engaged.
– In addition, a warning buzzer sounds
and the coupling ball bar pivots
downward.
z Pivot the coupling ball bar rearward until
it engages.
– LED must go out
– Warning buzzer must cease
– Otherwise, repeat the procedure.
6 Further information – see page 221.
34
Instruments
Instruments
Control indicators
The control indicators described here are
not present in all vehicles. The description
applies to all instrument versions.
O
Turn signal lights
The relevant control indicator flashes when
the turn signal is on.
Both control indicators flash with the
hazard warning lights on.
Control indicators ................................
Instrument display ...............................
Information display .............................
Radio reception 3................................
AUX input 3.........................................
Infotainment system 3........................
Remote control for infotainment
system 3 and information display ..
Twin Audio 3 .......................................
Electronic data acquisition at toll
systems 3...........................................
Mobile telephones and radio
equipment 3......................................
34
40
42
59
60
60
60
60
61
61
Rapid flashing: failure of turn signal or
associated fuse. Trailer turn signal
failure 3. For bulb replacement see
page 252, for fuses see page 246.
I
Engine oil pressure
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
Illuminates when the engine is running
Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This
may result in damage to the engine and/or
locking of the drive wheels:
1. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly
as possible without impeding other
vehicles.
2. Depress clutch.
3. Shift manual transmission or
Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic
transmission 3, set selector lever to N.
4. Switch off ignition.
9 Warning
When the engine is off, considerably
more force is needed to brake and steer.
Do not remove key until vehicle has come
to a standstill, otherwise the steering
column lock could engage unexpectedly.
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Instruments
35
v
Airbag systems 3,
belt tensioners 3
If it illuminates while driving, there is a fault
in the airbag systems, seat occupancy
recognition 3 or the belt tensioners, see
pages 108, 117.
W
R
Picture no: 18276j.tif
Brake system,
clutch system
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on if the hand brake is
applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is
too low. Further information
– see pages 212, 272.
For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control
indicator flashes for a few seconds when
the ignition is turned off if the hand brake
is not applied.
9 Warning
If it illuminates when the hand brake is
not applied: Stop the vehicle; interrupt
your journey immediately. Consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
p
Picture no:
Alternator
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
Flashing while starting
Battery voltage too low. Have electrical
system tested in a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Illuminates when the engine is running
Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not
charged. Engine cooling may not be
operating. With a diesel engine the brake
servo unit may stop operating. Consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Coolant temperature
Illuminates when the engine is running
Stop and turn engine off, coolant
temperature is too high. Risk of engine
damage. For coolant temperature display
see page 41. Check coolant level
immediately, see page 270.
8
Exterior lights
The control indicator is illuminated when
the exterior lights are on – see page 128.
1
SPORT mode of
automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3
The control indicator is illuminated when
SPORT mode 3 is engaged.
Further information – see pages 173, 181.
6
36
Instruments
>
Fog lights 3
The control indicator is illuminated when
the fog lights are on – see page 130.
C
Main beam
The control indicator illuminates if the main
beam is on and during headlight flash
– see pages 14, 128.
r
Picture no: 18276j.tif
T
Winter program of
automatic transmission 3
Easytronic 3
Control indicator is illuminated when winter
program is enabled.
Further information – see pages 174, 182.
(
Door open
Illuminates with the doors open.
j
Picture no:
Easytronic 3,
start engine
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is turned on if the foot brake is not
operated. It goes off as soon as the foot
brake is operated. The engine can only be
started with the foot brake operated
– see page 171.
t
Bulb replacement 3
A bulb has failed. Check the lights, and
exchange the failed bulb. Bulb exchange
– see page 252.
s
Bootlid open
Illuminates with the luggage compartment
open, close luggage compartment
– see page 70.
Fog tail light
The control indicator is illuminated when
the fog tail light is on – see page 130.
r
Parking distance sensor 3
see page 204.
u
Continuous Damping Control 3,
SPORT mode
see page 200.
X
Seat belt 3
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and remains
illuminated until the seat belt is fastened. If
the seat belt is not yet fastened after
driving off, an acoustic warning also
sounds. Fastening the seat belt
– see page 109.
Instruments
A
Engine electronics,
transmission electronics 3,
diesel fuel filter 3,
immobiliser
Illuminates when the engine is running
Fault in engine electronics or transmission
electronics. Electronics switch to
emergency running programme, fuel
consumption may increase and driveability
of the vehicle may be impaired
– see page 196. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
1)
Diesel engines Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT,
Z 19 DTH: Have water drained from diesel
fuel filter, see page 270.
Flashes when the ignition is on
Fault in the electronic immobiliser system;
the engine cannot be started
– see page 63.
!
Preheating system 3,
Diesel particle filter 3
Lights
Preheating system active, switches on only
if outside temperature is low.
Flashing (with diesel particle filter)
Diesel particle filters must be cleaned.
Continue driving and as soon as the road
and traffic conditions permit it, increase
speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h), at
which point diesel particle filter cleaning
will start. The control indicator goes off as
soon as cleaning is complete. We
recommend leaving the ignition switched
on during the cleaning.
Further information – see page 197.
H
Coolant level
Illuminates when the engine is running
Coolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off
engine. Check coolant fluid level
immediately, see page 271.
u
Anti-lock brake system
see page 212.
1)
Sales designation – see page 284
p
37
Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering
Fault in electro-hydraulic steering system.
Power steering may not work. Vehicle can
still be steered, but considerably more
force is required. We recommend you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
v
Electronic Stability
Programme (ESP®Plus ) 3
see page 198.
y
Seat occupancy recognition 3
see page 118.
38
Instruments
If it flashes when the engine is running:
Fault that can lead to destruction of the
catalytic converter is indicated
– see page 195. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
w
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3
Illuminated red
Tyre pressure difference, check tyre
pressure at next opportunity.
S
Picture no: 18276j.tif
Engine oil level 3
Illuminates when the engine is running
Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil
level and top up engine oil if necessary
– see page 268.
m
Cruise control 3
see page 202.
Y
Fuel level
Lights
Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserve area.
Flashing
Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately.
Never let the tank run dry!
Picture no:
Petrol engines: erratic fuel supply can
cause catalytic converter to overheat
– see page 193.
Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel system as described on page 229.
Z
Exhaust gases 3
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
Illuminates when the engine is running
Fault in emission control system. The
permitted emission limits may be
exceeded. Consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Flashes red
Considerable pressure difference or direct
loss of pressure, stop immediately and
check tyres and tyre pressure.
Illuminated yellow
Fault in system, consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
– see page 206.
B
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL)
System fault. In the event of malfunction of
the curve lighting pivot function, the
releveant dipped beam light is
deactivated. Consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
AFL – see page 131.
Instruments
D
Automatic mode of
automatic transmission.
1-5
Manual mode, current gear for
Easytronic.
1-5
1-6 3
and
Manual mode, selected gear
with automatic.
39
For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a
few seconds if A, M or R is selected when
the engine is running but the foot brake is
not depressed.
Picture no: 17536j.tif
Transmission display 3
Display of the selected gear position
with automatic transmission 3
or the selected gear with Easytronic 3:
P
Park position of automatic
transmission.
R
Reverse gear.
N
Neutral or idling position.
A
Automatic mode of Easytronic.
M
Manual mode of Easytronic.
Picture no: 17858j.tif
InSP
Service interval display 3
When InSP appears in the odometer
display, make an appointment with a
workshop for servicing as soon as possible.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Maintenance, inspection system
– see page 266.
40
Instruments
Odometer
Records the miles driven.
Display in the event of airbag system
malfunction – see page 117.
Trip odometer
To set to zero, hold reset knob down for
approx. 2 seconds with ignition switched
on.
Picture no: 17537j.tif
Instrument display
On some versions, the pointer of the
tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge
briefly moves to its end position when the
ignition is switched on.
Picture no:
Tachometer
Indicates engine speed.
Warning zone: Maximum permissible
engine speed exceeded; danger to engine.
Speedometer
Indicates the vehicle speed.
Instruments
41
For physical reasons, the engine
temperature gauge shows the coolant
temperature only if the coolant level is
adequate.
During operation the system is pressurised.
The temperature may therefore rise briefly
to over 100 °C.
Picture no: 17538j.tif
Coolant temperature display
Pointer in zone at
left
= Engine operating
temperature not
yet reached
Pointer between
the zones
Pointer in
warning zone at
right or W is
illuminated
= Normal operating
temperature
Picture no: 17539j.tif
Fuel gauge
Pointer in left
zone or Y
illuminated
Pointer in left
zone or Y
flashing
= Reserve area
= Fill up – see
page 191
Never run the tank dry!
= Temperature too
high:
Stop. Switch off
engine. Risk of
engine damage.
Check coolant level
immediately, see
page 271.
Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel system as described on page 229.
Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
may be less than the specified tank
capacity.
42
Instruments
12:01 17 ,0°C
FM 3 90,6 MHz
REG
AS
RDS
TP
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Range
Range
RDS
[TP]
257miles
Picture no: 17336t.tif
Information display
Triple information display
Display of time, outside temperature and
date/infotainment system 3 (when it is on).
When the ignition is off, the time, date and
outside temperature can be presented for
15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the
two buttons below the display.
An F in the display indicates a fault. Have
the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Board information display 3
Display of time, outside temperature and
date/infotainment system 3 (when it is on).
An F in the display indicates a fault. Have
the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
23°
5
257 miles
21.3 miles/gal
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Graphical information display 3,
Colour information display 3
Display of time, outside temperature, date/
infotainment system 3 (when it is on) and
climate control system 3.
The graphical information display presents
the information in monochrome. The colour
information display presents the
information in colour.
Instruments
The type of information and how it is
displayed depends on the equipment of
the vehicle and the Infotainment
system 3,trip computer 3 and climate
control system 3 settings.
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form.
For Infotainment system see Infotainment
system instructions. For climate control
system - see page 158.
An F in the display indicates a fault. Have
the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
43
:
8:56
-5 ,5°C
07.04.2004
Slippery road
-2,5°C
OK
Picture no: 17336t.tif
Outside temperature
A fall in temperature is indicated
immediately and a rise in temperature
after a time delay.
If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the
symbol : illuminates in the triple
information display or the board
information display 3 as a warning for icy
road surfaces. : remains illuminated until
temperatures reach at least 5 °C.
Picture no: 17338t.tif
In vehicles with graphical information
display 3 or colour information display 3,
an icy road surface warning message
appears in the display. No message is
displayed if the temperature is less than
-5 °C.
9 Warning
Caution: The road surface may already
be icy even though the display indicates
a few degrees above 0 °C.
44
Instruments
8:56
5 ,5°C
07.04.2004
Picture no: 17024t.tif
Triple information display
Set date and time
Infotainment system off: press Ö and ;
below the display as follows:
Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds:
Day flashes
;: Set day
Ö: Month flashes
;: Set month
Ö: Year flashes
;: Set year
Ö: Hours flash
;: Set hours
Ö: Minutes flash
;: Set minutes
Ö: Clock is started.
Correcting time 3
Some RDS transmitters do not send a
correct time signal. If the incorrect time is
continually displayed, deactivate
automatic time synchronisation 3, see next
column, and set the time manually.
The automatic setting is indicated by } in
the display.
Deactivating/activating automatic time
synchronisation: infotainment system off,
press Ö and ; below the display:
Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock
display is now in setting mode,
Press Ö twice (until year flashes),
Press Ö and hold down for approx.
3 seconds until } flashes in display 3
and text "RDS TIME" appears (years
flash during this time),
Press ;, display shows:
RDS TIME 0 = Off
Press ;, display shows:
RDS TIME 1 = On
Press Ö three times.
Instruments
11:25 }
45
21 .5°C
Range
257miles
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Board information display 3,
Selecting functions
Functions and settings of some
equipment 3 can be accessed via the
board information display.
This is done via the menus and the buttons/
four-way button on the infotainment
system 3 or with the left adjuster wheel 3
on the steering wheel. The relevant menu
options are then shown on the subsequent
row of the display.
Picture no: 17012t.tif
Select options via the menus and with the
buttons/four-way button on the
infotainment system 3.
Picture no: 17541j.tif
Depending on the equipment level of the
vehicle, menu options can be selected with
the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering
wheel. The relevant menu options are then
shown on the subsequent row of the
display.
If check control 3 warning messages are
displayed, the display is blocked for other
functions. Acknowledge warning message
by pressing the right or left side of the fourway button or by pressing the left adjuster
wheel 3 on the steering wheel. If there are
several warning messages, acknowledge
them one at a time.
System settings – see page 46.
Trip computer 3 – see page 48.
46
Instruments
The functions are displayed in the following
order:
11:25 }
21 .5°C
System
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Board information display 3,
System settings
Press the Settings button of the
infotainment system. Menu item Audio or
System will appear.
Press the lower button of the four-way
button to reach menu item System. After
pressing the right-hand part of the fourway button, the first function of the System
menu is shown.
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Time synchronisation
Time, setting hours
Time, setting minutes
Date, setting day
Date, setting month
Date, setting year
Ignition logic
Language selection
Setting units of measure
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Clock Sync.On
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Correcting time 3
Some RDS transmitters do not send a
correct time signal. If the incorrect time is
continually displayed, deactivate
automatic time synchronisation 3 and set
the time manually - see next page.
Instruments
47
The automatic setting is indicated by } in
the display.
To correct time with the help of RDS, select
the menu item for time synchronisation
from the Settings menu.
Make the desired setting.
Setting date and time
Select the menu item for time and date
setting from the Settings menu.
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Deutsch
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Unit Europe-SI
Make the desired setting.
The setting is executed upon exit from the
menu item.
Ignition logic 3
See infotainment system instructions.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Language selection
You can select the display language for
some functions.
Setting units of measure
You can select which units of measure are
to be used.
Select the menu item for language from the
Settings menu and make the desired
setting.
Select the menu item for units of measure
from the Settings menu and make the
desired setting.
48
Instruments
Board information display 3,
trip computer 3
The trip computer provides information on
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically.
Access trip computer vehicle data by
pressing the BC button on the infotainment
system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the
steering wheel.
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form.
Once an audio function has been selected,
the subsequent rows of the trip computer
function are displayed.
The functions are displayed in the following
order:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Instantaneous consumption
Average consumption
Effective consumption
Average speed
Distance travelled
Range
Stop watch
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Average consumption
Display of average consumption.
Calculation can be restarted at any time see next page.
Inst. Consumpt.
Effective consumption
Fuel consumption display.
The measurement can be restarted at any
time - see next page.
7.6 miles/gal
Average speed
Display of average speed. Calculation can
be restarted at any time - see next page.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
off are not included in the calculations.
Instantaneous consumption
Display changes depending on speed:
Display in gal/h
below 8 mph (13 km/h),
Display in mpg
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Distance travelled
Display of mileage. Calculation can be
restarted at any time - see next page.
Instruments
11:25 }
21 .5°C
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Range
Stop Watch
257miles
01:22:32 h
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Range
Range is calculated from current fuel tank
content and instantaneous consumption.
The display shows average values.
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
range automatically after a brief delay.
If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the
warning "Range" appears on the display.
If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the
warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the
display.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
49
Resetting trip computer information
The following trip computer information
can be reset (restart of measurement/
calculation):
z
z
z
z
Average consumption,
Effective consumption,
Average speed,
Distance travelled.
Select the desired trip computer
information.
Reset using the left wheel on the steering
wheel or the right/left button of the fourway button:
Stop watch
Operation with the four-way button:
Press for more than
2 seconds
current value
Press right button
Start/Stop,
Press left button for
more than 2 seconds
Press for more than
4 seconds
all values.
Reset
Interruption of power supply
If the power supply has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage has dropped too low,
the values stored in the trip computer will
be lost.
Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3
on the steering wheel:
Press
Start/Stop.
50
Instruments
Range
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
23°
5
257 miles
21.3 miles/gal
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Graphical information display 3
or colour information display 3,
Selecting functions
The functions and settings of some
equipment 3 can be accessed via the
graphical information display or the colour
information display.
Functions are selected and executed in the
menu on the display using the four-way
button, the multifunction button 3 on the
infotainment system or the left wheel 3 on
the steering wheel.
Picture no: 17012t.tif
Picture no: 17013t.tif
To select with four-way button:
To select using the multifunction button:
Select menu items via menus and with the
buttons/four-way button of the
infotainment system.
Turn
Mark menu items
or commands, select
functions
If check control 3 warning messages are
displayed, the display is blocked for other
functions. Acknowledge warning message
by pressing the right or left side of the fourway button. If there are several warning
messages, acknowledge them one at a
time.
Press
Select marked item,
confirm command.
To exit a menu, turn the multifunction
button left or right to Return or Main and
select.
If check control 3 issues a warning
message, the display is blocked from other
functions. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the multifunction button. If there
are several warning messages,
acknowledge them one at a time.
Instruments
7
FM AS
[TP]
REG
CDin
MP3
Settings
Time, Date
51
19,5° 19:36
19:36
Language
�
90.6 MHz
Units
10 . 07 . 2004
Contrast
Day / Night
19,5°
Picture no: 17541j.tif
To select using the left adjuster wheel 3 on
the steering wheel:
Turn up
Previous
menu item
Turn down
Next
menu item
Press
Select marked item,
confirm command.
If check control 3 warning messages are
displayed, the displaying of other
messages is blocked. Acknowledge the
warning message by pressing the left
adjuster wheel. If there are several warning
messages, acknowledge them one at a
time.
19:36
Picture no: 17331t.tif
For each functional area there is a main
page (Main), which is selected at the top
edge of the display (not with the
Infotainment system CD 30 or the Mobile
Phone Portal):
z
z
z
z
Audio,
Navigation 3,
Telephone 3,
Trip computer 3.
For audio, navigation 3 and telephone
functions 3, see infotainment system
instructions.
6 Ign. logic
Picture no: 17332t.tif
System settings
The settings are accessed via the Settings
menu.
Press the Main button 3 (not found on all
infotainment systems) on the infotainment
system (call up main display).
Press the Settings button of the
infotainment system. No menu may be
selected with Infotainment System CD 30.
The Settings menu is displayed.
52
Instruments
7
Time, Date
19,5° 19:36
Time
19:36
Date
10 . 07 . 2004
6 Synchron. clock automatical.
Picture no: 17340t.tif
Setting the date and time 3
Select menu item Time, Date from the
Settings menu.
The menu for Time, Date is displayed.
Select the menu items required:
Correcting time 3
For systems with GPS receiver1), time and
date are automatically set upon receipt of
a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time
does not correspond to local time, time can
be manually corrected in 30-minute
increments or automatically corrected via
receipt of an RDS time signal2) 3.
Some RDS transmitters do not send correct
time signals. If the incorrect time is
displayed often, deactivate automatic
time synchronisation 3 and set the time
manually.
To correct time with the help of RDS, select
menu item Synchron. clock automatical.
from the Time, Date menu.
The box in front of Synchron. clock
automatical. will be ticked; see
Fig. 17340 T.
7
Settings
19,5° 19:36
Time, Date
Language
Deutsch
Units
English
Contrast
Español
Day / Night
...
6 Ign. logic
Picture no: 17341t.tif
Language selection
You can select the display language for
some functions.
Select menu item Language from the
Settings menu.
The available languages are displayed.
Make the desired setting.
1)
2)
GPS = Global Positioning System,
Satellite system for world-wide positioning.
RDS = Radio Data System.
Instruments
7
13 Languages
19,5° 19:36
X Deutsch
7 Settings
19,5° 19:36
Language
~
Europe-SI
Español
Units
Japan
Nederlands
Contrast
|
|
|
Français
Day / Night
Italiano
6 Ign. logic
Picture no: 17342t.tif
Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of
the menu item.
In systems with voice output 3, when the
language setting of the display is changed
the system will ask whether the
announcement language should also be
changed – see Infotainment system
instructions.
19,5° 19:36
Time, Date
English
Select the desired language.
7 Contrast
12
Great Britain
USA
Picture no: 17343t.tif
Setting units of measure
You can select which units of measure are
to be used.
Select menu item Units from the Settings
menu.
The available units are displayed.
Select the desired unit.
Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the menu item.
53
Picture no: 17926t.tif
Adjusting contrast 3
(graphical information display)
Select menu item Contrast from the
Settings menu.
The menu for Contrast is displayed.
Confirm the required setting.
54
Instruments
Setting display mode 3
The display can be adjusted to suit the light
conditions, black or coloured text on a light
background or white or coloured text on a
dark background.
Select menu item Day / Night from the
Settings menu.
The options are displayed.
Automatic: adapted based on vehicle
lighting.
Always day design: black or coloured text
on light background.
Always night design: white or coloured
text on dark background.
Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the menu item.
Ignition logic 3
See infotainment system instructions.
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
19,5° 19:36
All values
1
257.0
Ø 40
8
11.0
Ø 21.3
Tyres
Range
257 miles
miles
mph
Inst. consumpt.
21.3 miles/gal
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17344t.tif
Graphical information display 3
or colour information display 3,
Trip computer 3
The trip computers provide information on
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically.
The trip computer main page provides
information on range and instantaneous
consumption.
To display other trip computer data, press
the BC button on the infotainment
system 3, select the trip computer menu
on the display or press the left adjuster
wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
19,5°
23°
5
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Range
Range is calculated from current fuel tank
content and instantaneous consumption.
The display shows average values.
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
range automatically after a brief delay.
Instruments
Distance travelled
Displays number of miles driven.
Measurement can be restarted at any time,
see next column.
Range
30 miles
OK
Picture no: 17345t.tif
If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the
warning "Range" appears on the display.
If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the
warning "Please refuel!" 3 appears on the
display.
Acknowledge the menu item as described
on page 50.
Instantaneous consumption
Display changes depending on speed:
Display in gal/h
below 8 mph (13 km/h),
Display in mpg
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Ü Board Computer
Average speed
Average speed calculation. Measurement
can be restarted at any time, see next
column.
BC 1
Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
off are not included in the calculations.
Tyres
Effective consumption
Shows amount of fuel consumed. The
measurement can be re-started at any
time. See next column.
Average consumption
Calculation of average consumption. The
measurement can be re-started at any
time. See next column.
19,5° 19:36
All values
BC 2
Timer
55
1
257.0
Ø 40
8
11.0
Ø 21.3
miles
mph
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17344t.tif
Resetting trip computer information
The following trip computer information
can be reset (restart measurements):
z
z
z
z
Distance travelled,
Average speed,
Effective consumption,
Average consumption.
Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
menu.
56
Instruments
Ü Reset BC 1
19,5° 19:36
11.0
Ø 21.3
19,5° 19:36
All values
All values
257.0
Ø 40
Ü Reset BC 1
miles
mph
257.0
Ø 40
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17346t.tif
The information from both trip computers
can be reset separately, making it possible
to evaluate data over different time
periods.
Select the desired trip computer
information.
The value for the selected function will be
reset and recalculated.
Ø
31.0
7.0
miles
mph
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17347t.tif
To reset all information of a trip computer,
select menu item All values.
If trip computer information has been
selected, "- - -" is displayed after a reset.
The recalculated values are displayed after
a brief delay.
Interruption of power supply
If the power supply has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage has dropped too low,
the values stored in the trip computer will
be lost.
Instruments
57
The desired stop watch display can be
selected from the Options menu 3:
Ü Board Computer
19,5° 19:36
BC 1
BC 2
00:00:00
Timer
Tyres
Start
Reset
Options
Picture no: 17348t.tif
Stop watch
Select menu item Timer from the Board
Computer menu.
The Timer menu is displayed.
Driving Time excl. Stops
The time the vehicle is in motion is
recorded. Stationary time is not included.
Driving Time incl. Stops
The time the vehicle is in motion is
recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary
with the key in the ignition switch is
included.
Travel Time
Measurement of the time from manual
activation via Start to manual deactivation
via Reset.
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Picture no: 17334t.tif
Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Tyres from the Board
Computer menu.
To start, select menu item Start.
The current pressure of each tyre is
displayed.
To reset, select menu item Reset.
Further information – see page 206.
58
Instruments
Check control 3
Check control monitors several fluid levels,
the tyre pressure 3, the radio remote
control batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3
and the main vehicle lighting systems,
including the cables and fuses. When
towing, the trailer lighting system is also
monitored.
Once the ignition has been switched on, all
check control functions are automatically
verified.
Warning messages appear on the display.
If there are several warning messages, they
are displayed one after the other.
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form.
Examples of warning messages for the
graphical information display 3 and colour
information display 3 are depicted. On the
board information display, messages
appear in an abbreviated form.
Acknowledge warning messages as
described on pages 45, 50.
Unacknowledged warning messages can
be re-displayed later.
Coolant level
check
Warning messages:
Remote Control
Battery
check
Remote control battery voltage is too low –
see page 65.
OK
Picture no: 17339t.tif
Brakelight switch
check
Fault. Brake light does not come on when
brake applied. Have cause of fault
remedied immediately. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Safeguard
check
Fault. System error in Vauxhall alarm
system. Have cause of fault remedied
immediately. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Instruments
If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting
system, the respective location of the fault
is displayed as text, e.g.:
Brakelight
check right
If brake light is defective, the relevant tail
light takes over the brake light function.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the
display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.:
Tyre pressure
check rear
right tyre
(value in bar)
Check tyre pressure at next opportunity
using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure
monitoring system 3 – see page 206.
Checking tyre pressure – see page 299.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3, if there is major loss of pressure
in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at
fault, e.g.:
Attention!
Rear left tyre
pressure loss
(value in bar)
Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre
pressure. For tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 – see page 206.
Wash
Fluid Level
check
Fluid level in windscreen wash system too
low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 275.
Rear window wash system and headlight
wash system 3 are deactivated if wash
fluid level is low.
Coolant level
check
Fluid level in engine cooling system is low.
Check coolant level immediately
– see page 270.
Interruption of power supply
Stored warning messages appear on the
display one after the other.
59
Radio reception 3
Car radio reception differs from domestic
radio reception:
As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the
ground, the broadcasting companies
cannot guarantee the same quality of
reception as obtained with a domestic
radio using an overhead antenna.
z Changes in distance from the
transmitter,
z multi-path reception due to reflection
and
z shadowing
may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss
of reception altogether.
60
Instruments
Picture no: 18463j.tif
AUX input 3
The AUX input is in the stowage
compartment in the centre console.
An external audio source such as a
portable CD player can be connected via
the AUX input.
Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times.
Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
instructions.
Infotainment system 3
The infotainment system is operated as
described in the operating instructions.
Picture no: 17540j.tif
Remote control for
infotainment system 3 and
information display
The functions of the infotainment system 3
and the information display can be
operated with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Further information – see pages 45, 50 and
the relevant operating instructions.
Picture no: 17542j.tif
Twin Audio 3
Twin Audio gives rear seat occupants the
opportunity to listen to the audio source set
on the infotainment system 3 or one of the
other audio sources.
Only an audio source that is not currently
active on the infotainment system can be
controlled using Twin Audio.
Two headphone connections are available,
with separate volume controls.
Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
instructions.
Instruments
Mobile telephones and radio
equipment 3
The Vauxhall installation instructions and
the operating guidelines provided by the
telephone manufacturer must be observed
when fitting and operating a mobile
telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate
the vehicle’s operating permit (EU Directive
95/54/EG).
Recommended prerequisites for fault-free
operation:
Picture no: 17543j.tif
Electronic data acquisition at toll
systems 3
In vehicles with heat-reflecting
windscreen1) 3 Attach chipcard 3 for
electronic data recording and fee payment
in black area of windscreen on left or righthand side behind the interior mirror, see
markings in figure. Attaching the chipcard
outside this area may cause data
recording malfunctions.
1)
Solar Reflect.
z Professionally installed exterior antenna
to obtain the maximum range possible,
z maximum transmission power 10 Watt,
61
A hands-free attachment without an
external antenna in mobile phone
standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS
must only be operated if the maximum
transmission power of the mobile phone
does not exceed 2 Watts with GSM 900 and
1 Watt in other cases. The operating
regulations stipulated by the manufacturer
of the telephone and the hands-free
attachment must be complied with.
For reasons of safety, we recommend that
you do not use the phone while driving.
Even use of a handsfree set can be a
distraction while driving. Be sure to observe
any country-specific regulations.
z installation of the telephone in a suitable
spot (see information on page 120).
9 Warning
Obtain advice on predetermined
installation locations for the external
antenna and equipment holder and ways
of using devices with transmission power of
more than 10 Watts. We recommend that
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will have brackets and
various installation kits available as
accessories and will install them in
accordance with regulations.
Mobile phones and radio equipment may
cause malfunctions in the vehicle
electronics if they are operated in the
vehicle without the external antenna
unless the above-mentioned regulations
are complied with.
Mobile phones that do not comply with
the above-mentioned mobile phone
standard and radio equipment must only
be operated using an antenna that is
attached to the exterior of the vehicle.
62
Keys, doors, bonnet
Keys, doors,
bonnet
Replacement keys
The key is a constituent of the electronic
immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer guarantees problemfree operation of the electronic
immobiliser.
Keep the spare key in a safe spot.
Locks, see page 281.
Car Pass 3
The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s
data and should therefore not be kept in
the vehicle.
Electronic immobiliser..........................
Radio remote control ..........................
Central locking system ........................
Fault when locking or unlocking.........
Luggage compartment.......................
Vauxhall alarm system 3....................
Child safety locks.................................
Universal radio remote control in
mirror housing 3 ...............................
Bonnet ..................................................
63
64
66
69
70
74
77
77
80
Have your Car Pass on hand when
consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17027t.tif
Key with foldaway key section 3
Press button to extend. Press button to
retract and audibly engage key section.
Keys, doors, bonnet
63
If control indicator A illuminates after the
engine is started, there is a fault in the
engine electronics or transmission
electronics 3 (see pages 37, 176, 184, 196)
or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3
(see page 270).
Note
The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always
lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm
system 3 – see pages 66, 74.
Picture no: 17349t.tif
Electronic immobiliser
The system checks whether the vehicle may
be started using the key that has been
inserted. If the key is recognised as
"authorised" the vehicle can be started.
The check is carried out via a transponder
in the key.
The electronic immobiliser activates
automatically when the key is removed
from the ignition switch.
Picture no: 17544j.tif
Control indicator for immobiliser
Control indicator A illuminates briefly
when the ignition is switched on.
If the control indicator flashes when the
ignition is on, there is a fault in the system;
the engine cannot be started. Switch off
the ignition and then repeat the start
attempt.
If control indicator A continues to flash,
try to start the engine using the spare key
and consult a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
64
Keys, doors, bonnet
Radio remote control
Store and activate personal vehicle
settings using the radio remote control
The settings for the instrument illumination,
the central locking system. the memory
function 3 for the driver’s seat and the
mirror and the climate control system 3 are
stored automatically depending on the key
that is used.
The radio remote control is integrated in
the key.
Used to operate:
z central locking system,
z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
z Vauxhall alarm system 3,
z electrically operated tailgate 3.
Different settings are stored for each
remote control. Use of a remote control will
activate the settings associated with it.
In addition, electric windows 3 can be
opened and closed using the radio remote
control. The electric sun roof 3 can be
closed using the radio remote control.
Picture no: 17029t.tif
The settings for five radio remote controls
can be stored.
The radio remote control has a range of
approx. 3 metres. This range can be
affected by outside influences. Aim the
remote control at the vehicle to operate.
Central locking system,
see page 66.
Handle the radio remote control with care,
protect it from moisture and high
temperatures and avoid unnecessary
operation.
Boot lid or tailgate,
see page 70.
The hazard warning lights come on to
indicate that the remote control is
operational.
Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
see page 66.
Vauxhall alarm system 3,
see page 74.
Electric windows 3,
see page 136.
Electrically operated sun roof 3,
see page 139.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Fault
If the central locking system cannot be
operated with the radio remote control, it
may be due to the following:
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in accordance with environmental
protection regulations.
Radio remote control synchronisation
After a battery change, unlock door with
key in lock, see page 69. Inserting the key
into the lock synchronises the radio remote
control.
z The range of the radio remote control
has been exceeded.
z Radio remote control battery voltage is
too low. Battery replacement - see next
page.
z Frequent, repeated operation of the
radio remote control outside the
reception range of the vehicle (e.g. too
far from vehicle, remote control is then
no longer recognised). Remote control
synchronisation – see next page.
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
supply is cut off for a brief period.
z Interference from higher-power radio
waves from other sources.
We recommended that you have the cause
of the fault remedied by your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Manual unlocking and locking using the
vehicle key, see page 69.
65
Picture no: 17031t.tif
Remote control battery replacement
Replace the battery as soon as the range
of the radio remote control begins to
shrink.
Extending the key – see page 62.
Open the radio remote control. Replace the
battery (battery type – see page 307),
noting installation position. Close the radio
remote control.
66
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 17042t.tif
Central locking system
For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap.
To lock
Press button p on radio remote control.
Picture no: 17043t.tif
Securing
with the mechanical anti-theft locking
system 3
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from inside.
All doors must be closed. Press button p
on radio remote control again no more
than 15 seconds after locking.
Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
such that doors cannot be opened.
If the ignition was on, the driver’s door
must be opened and closed once so that
the vehicle can be secured.
Picture no: 16968t.tif
To unlock
Press button q on radio remote control.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Automatic locking 3
The central locking can be set to lock
automatically at a certain speed.
Programming
unlocking mode 3
When the vehicle is delivered from the
factory, the remote control is preset so that
a single press of the q button opens all of
the doors and the luggage compartment.
The unit can be configured so that a single
press of the q button unlocks the entire
vehicle or just the driver’s door.
Change to presetting:
Hold button q on the remote control and
button m in the driver’s door depressed
simultaneously until a double buzzer
sounds. Afterwards, only the driver’s door
will be unlocked when button q is pressed
once.
The entire vehicle is then unlocked by
pressing button q on the remote control
twice.
To restore the original settings, hold button
q of the remote control and button m in
the driver’s door depressed simultaneously
until a buzzer sounds.
The current setting is stored for the radio
remote control, see page 64.
67
To activate the function, hold button p of
the remote control and button m in the
driver’s door depressed simultaneously
until a double buzzer sounds.
Picture no: 17866j.tif
Central locking switch for locking and
unlocking the doors from inside the
vehicle
Press button m in the driver’s door: Doors
and luggage compartment are locked.
Press button ) in the driver’s door: Doors
and luggage compartment are unlocked.
In the estate with electrically operated
tailgate 3, the doors and luggage
compartment are locked and unlocked
with button m.
When the mechanical anti-theft locking
system is active 3, see page 66, the doors
cannot be unlocked with this button.
If the vehicle is locked using the remote
control, buttons m and ) in the driver’s
door are inoperable.
The doors and luggage compartment are
unlocked by switching off the ignition or by
pressing button ) or, for estate with
electrically operated tailgate 3, by
pressing button m in the driver’s door.
Individual doors can be unlocked by
pulling the lock button.
To deactivate the function, hold button p
of the remote control and button m in the
driver’s door depressed simultaneously
until a buzzer sounds.
The current setting is stored for the radio
remote control, see page 64.
68
Keys, doors, bonnet
Note
z If the driver’s door is not closed properly,
the central locking system will unlock
again immediately after locking.
On vehicles with electric windows, the
windows can be opened and closed from
outside: Hold down button q or p on the
remote control until all windows are open
or fully closed.
z 30 seconds after unlocking using the
radio remote control the doors
automatically lock again 3 if neither a
door nor the luggage compartment has
been opened.
The sun roof can be closed from outside:
Hold down button p on the remote control
until the sun roof is fully closed.
Version with electrically retractable
exterior mirrors 3: The mirrors are
retracted/extended when the windows are
closed/opened with the remote control.
z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to
prevent undesired access from outside),
press the central locking switch m.
z If they are locked, the doors and the
luggage compartment unlock
automatically in the event of an accident
of a certain severity (to permit outside
assistance). – Prerequisite: Ignition must
not be switched off.
Picture no: 17046t.tif
Window and sliding roof operation 3 from
the outside.
9 Warning
Take care when operating the electric
windows and the sun roof. Risk of injury,
particularly to children.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
accordingly.
Keep a close watch on the windows and
sun roof when closing them. Ensure that
nothing becomes trapped in them as
they move.
If the mirrors are retracted using the button
in the driver’s door, they remain in this
position when the windows are opened.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Automatic closing 3
If the mechanical anti-theft locking
system 3 is activated, the electronic
windows and sun roof 3 are automatically
closed and the electrically retractable
exterior mirrors 3 are automatically
retracted as soon as the rain sensor 3
detects water on the windscreen.
To safeguard the battery from discharge
by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the
windows and sun roof 3 are automatically
closed and the electrically retractable
exterior mirrors 3 are automatically
retracted.
For further information on windows and
the sun roof – see pages 138, 141.
Fault
If the central locking system cannot be
operated with the radio remote control, it
may be due to the following:
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
supply is cut off for a brief period.
z Defective fuse in fuse box – see
page 246.
Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer
to have the cause of the fault remedied.
Operating the driver’s door with the key see next section.
69
Malfunction in central locking system
To unlock
Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn
forwards as far as it will go. Turn key back
to a vertical position and remove. The
other doors can be unlocked by pulling the
interior lock button (unless the mechanical
anti-theft locking system has been
enabled 3). The luggage compartment
and the fuel filler cap remain locked.
Picture no: 17546j.tif
Fault when locking or unlocking
Radio remote control fault
To unlock
Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn
forwards as far as it will go. Turn key back
to vertical position and remove from lock.
Unlock driver’s door with central locking
switch, see page 67.
The mechanical anti-theft locking
system 3 and the Vauxhall alarm system 3
are deactivated when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
To lock
Open front passenger door, close driver’s
door, lock vehicle using central locking
switch, see page 67, close front passenger
door.
To lock
Lock front passenger door and rear doors
by pushing the interior lock button. Lock
driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key
towards rear of vehicle as far as it will go,
turn key to a vertical position and remove.
The unlocked fuel filler cap and the
luggage compartment cannot be locked.
70
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 16968t.tif
Luggage compartment
To unlock
Press button q on radio remote control.
Picture no: 17503j.tif
To open
The luggage compartment of the saloon is
opened by pushing the button, and the
luggage compartment of the estate is
opened by pulling the catch beneath the
handle.
Illumination of s indicates the the
luggage compartment is open.
For notes on open luggage compartment
lid, paying attention to open tailgate
– see page 73.
Electrically operated tailgate 3 - see next
page.
Picture no: 17547j.tif
To close
There is a handle on the inside of the
luggage compartment lid or tailgate for
closing the luggage compartment.
With the estate, do not operate the catch
beneath the handle when closing.
Otherwise the luggage compartment will
be unlocked again.
Keys, doors, bonnet
71
Electrically operated tailgate, estate 3
In vehicle with an electrically operated
tailgate the tailgate can be electrically
opened and closed after unlocking.
9 Warning
Make sure there is 2.03 m clearance
before operating the electric tailgate.
Observe the pivoting zone of the tailgate
during operation and do not enter the
pivoting zone.
Picture no: 17042t.tif
To lock
Press button p on the radio remote control
– or –
Central locking switch m in driver’s door press when doors are closed.
To open
Unlock the vehicle by pressing button q on
the remote control. The tailgate is opened
electrically by pulling the button beneath
the handle.
– or –
Picture no: 17548j.tif
Briefly press button r of the remote
control to unlock the tailgate (the doors
remain locked). Pull the button under the
handle to open the tailgate electrically
– or –
Hold button r of the remote control
depressed for more than 1 second (the
doors remain locked)to electrically unlock
and open the tailgate
– or –
6
72
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 17867j.tif
With the key in the ignition switch and the
hand brake applied, hold button x in the
driver’s door depressed for approx.
1 second. The tailgate opens electrically.
Picture no: 17548j.tif
To close
Hold button r on the remote control
depressed until the tailgate is closed.
– or –
With the key in the ignition switch, press
button x in the driver’s door until the
tailgate is closed.
– or –
Picture no: 17549j.tif
Press button F in the tailgate. The tailgate
closes electrically.
To lock, press button p on the radio
remote control.
Tailgate opening and closing is indicated
by the rear turn signal lights flashing three
times.
If the luggage compartment is not closed
within 20 minutes of opening, the button in
the tailgate is deactivated.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Interruption of tailgate opening/closing
procedure
Tailgate opening/closing can be
immediately interrupted by briefly pressing
button x in the driver’s door
– or –
Pressing button r on the remote control
– or –
Pressing the exterior button beneath the
handle
– or –
Pressing button F in the tailgate.
Safety function
The tailgate has an obstruction detection
facility. If the tailgate encounters
resistance during the automatic closing
movement, the closing procedure is
stopped immediately and the tailgate is
slowly opened again.
The tailgate remains in this position for
10 second and then slowly reopens.
Fault in electrically operated tailgate
If the electronic drive should fail, the
tailgate can be opended and closed
manually, although more force is required
to close the tailgate.
Vehicles with towing equipment 3: When
towing a caravan or trailer, the tailgate
cannot be operated using button r on the
remote control or button x in the driver’s
door.
Opening the tailgate when the doors are
locked via the central locking system
If the doors are locked via the central
locking system, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the button r on the remote
control and pulling the catch beneath the
handle.
73
Open boot lid,
open tailgate
9 Warning
Do not drive with the boot lid or tailgate
open or ajar, e.g. when transporting
bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gas
could penetrate the interior.
Also, the number plate of the estate
cannot be clearly read unless the
luggage compartment is closed.
Fitting accessories to the boot lid or
tailgate will increase its weight. If it
becomes too heavy, the boot lid or tailgate
will then not stay open.
74
Keys, doors, bonnet
Vauxhall alarm system 3
monitors
z the doors, luggage compartment,
bonnet,
z the passenger compartment,
z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from the inside.
Picture no: 17043t.tif
Picture no: 17550j.tif
To activate
All doors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the
bonnet must be closed. Press button p on
the radio remote control.
Activation without monitoring of
passenger compartment and vehicle tilt
e.g. if animals are to be left in the vehicle.
If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s
door must be opened and closed again so
that the Vauxhall alarm system can be
activated again.
2. Press button Ä, LED in button flashes
(maximum of 10 seconds), see next
page.
1. Close tailgate and bonnet.
3. Close doors.
4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system. LED
illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds the
system is activated, without monitoring
of the passenger compartment or vehicle
tilt. LED flashes until system is switched
off.
Keys, doors, bonnet
75
After the first 10 seconds of the Vauxhall
alarm system activation:
z LED flashes
slow
=
z LED illuminates for
approx. 1 second =
System
switched on,
Switch-off.
If a system fault occurs, consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17551j.tif
Light emitting diode (LED)
During the first 10 seconds of the Vauxhall
alarm system activation:
z LED illuminated =
Test, switch-on
delay,
z LED flashes
rapidly
Door, luggage
compartment,
or bonnet open,
system fault,
=
Picture no: 16968t.tif
To deactivate
Press button q on the remote control
– or –
switch on the ignition.
If there is a fault in the radio remote
control, unlock vehicle as described on
page 69.
If the alarm is triggered when the driver’s
door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall
alarm system by switching on the ignition.
76
Keys, doors, bonnet
3. After the luggage compartment is
closed, monitoring of the passenger
compartment, luggage compartment
and vehicle tilt is reactivated after a
5 minute delay and the tailgate is
locked. To override the delay, press
button p on the remote control.
Note
Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the
use of seat covers, could impair the
function of passenger compartment
monitoring.
Alarm
An alarm can be triggered whilst the
Vauxhall alarm system is active:
z an acoustic signal (horn) and
z a visual signal (hazard warning lights).
The number of alarms and the duration
thereof are stipulated by law.
Picture no: 17548j.tif
Estate with electrically operated
tailgate 3::
To open and close the luggage
compartment when the Vauxhall alarm
system is active
1. Briefly press button r on the remote
control – luggage compartment is
unlocked (see page 70), and monitoring
of the passenger compartment and
vehicle tilt is disabled.
2. Opening luggage compartment
– see page 70.
The alarm can be interrupted by pressing a
button on the remote control or by
switching on the ignition. Pressing
button q or switching on the ignition will
deactivate the Vauxhall alarm system at
the same time.
Keys, doors, bonnet
77
The programmed universal radio remote
control can replace the individual remote
control units of the systems to be operated.
Three buttons on the underside of the
mirror housing can be used to operate
various systems.
Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer
for details on compatible systems.
9 Warning
Picture no: 17052t.tif
Child safety locks
9 Warning
Use the child safety lock whenever
children are occupying the rear seats.
Disregard may lead to injuries or
endanger life. Vehicle passengers should
be informed accordingly.
Turn rotary knob at rear door lock from the
vertical position using key: door cannot be
opened from inside.
Picture no: 17552j.tif
Universal radio remote control in
mirror housing 3
to operate up to 3 different remotely
operated systems (e.g. garage door,
domestic alarm system, domestic exterior
lighting).
Ensure that no persons, animals or
objects are in the movement zone of the
system to be operated (e.g. a garage
door). Vehicle passengers should be
informed of the hazards.
78
Keys, doors, bonnet
Basic programming of the universal radio
control system
1. Switch on ignition.
2. When programming for the first time,
press both outer buttons under the
mirror housing, until the control indicator
alongside the buttons flashes rapidly.
3. Hold the manual remote control unit at a
distance of 0 to 30 cm from the control
button area of the mirror housing.
4. Press the button on the manual remote
control unit while pressing and holding
the desired button of the universal radio
remote control.
5. The control indicator in the mirror
housing will flash slowly at first. As soon
as it flashes rapidly, release both
buttons. The universal radio control
system is now programmed for the
chosen system.
6. To program other buttons with other
systems, repeat steps 3 to 5.
If a system cannot be operated after
repeated programming, and the control
indicator flashes rapidly for a short time
after the relevant button has been pressed
and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the
receiver may be equipped with a variable
code system, see next page.
Programming the universal radio control
system for variable code systems
1. Perform basic programming
– see previous column.
2. Activate synchronisation mode of
system (see system manufacturer’s
system operating manual) and briefly
press the pre-programmed button on
the universal radio remote control three
times within 30 seconds.
3. The radio control system is now
programmed for variable code systems.
To program other systems for variable
codes, repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other
buttons of the universal radio remote
control system.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Using the universal radio control system
With the ignition on, press the required
universal radio control button, and the
control indicator in the mirror housing will
illuminate. The pre-programmed system
can now be operated using the universal
radio control system.
Reprogramming individual
button settings
If a button that has already been
programmed is to be used for a different
system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the basic
programming procedure described
previously.
79
Clearing down all programmed button
settings
Before selling the vehicle, it is a good idea
to erase button settings.
Note
Keep replaced manual transmitters for
possible reprogramming. The manual
transmitters can also continue to be used.
Button settings can only be erased all at
once. It is not possible to erase individual
button settings. Buttons can, however, be
individually reprogrammed, see
"Reprogramming individual button
settings".
If after repeatedly performing the above
steps a system fails to respond to the
universal radio control, consult a workshop.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
In order to erase the programming of all
3 buttons, press both outer buttons and
release as soon as the LED begins to flash
(after approx. 20 seconds). All button
settings have now been cleared and can be
programmed anew at any time.
During programming, the vehicle should be
within the range of the receiver. Under no
circumstances should the vehicle be in the
movement zone of a system (e.g. garage
door).
Do not programme an system without an
automatic safety stop (manufactured
before April 1982).
Take note of the system manufacturer’s
safety instructions for drives and manual
remote control units.
80
Keys, doors, bonnet
Bonnet
Picture no: 17553j.tif
To open the bonnet, pull the release lever
located on the driver’s side below the
instrument panel. The bonnet will then be
unlocked and will partially open. Return
release lever to its original position.
Picture no: 17554j.tif
Picture no: 17555j.tif
There is a safety catch on the underside of
the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the
bonnet.
To hold the bonnet open, insert the support
located on the left side in the small slot on
the underside of the bonnet.
When the bonnet is opened, snow or dirt on
the bonnet can slide down and obstruct the
air intake. Air intake – see page 168.
Before closing, fasten the support in its
retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to
fall into its catch.
Check that the bonnet is locked in position
by pulling at its front edge. If it is not
engaged, repeat the procedure.
Seats, Interior
Seats, Interior
81
Push passenger seat as far back as
possible.
The seat backrests must not be tilted too
far back (recommended tilting angle
approx. 25°).
Head restraints ....................................
Armrest 3 between the front seats ....
Rear seat armrest ................................
Electrically adjustable front seats 3 ..
Travel Assistant 3 ...............................
Luggage compartment extension .....
Luggage compartment cover 3.........
Safety net 3, Estate.............................
Lashing eyes ........................................
Reversible carpet 3 .............................
FlexOrganizer 3...................................
Notes on loading the vehicle..............
Cigarette lighter 3...............................
Accessory socket 3..............................
Ashtray .................................................
Stowage compartments......................
Drink holders ........................................
Sun visors..............................................
82
83
84
84
87
94
95
96
98
98
98
100
101
101
102
103
105
105
9 Warning
Failure to observe the descriptions could
lead to injuries which could be fatal.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
accordingly before starting off.
Picture no: 17350t.tif
Front seat adjustment
See page 3.
Seat position
Adjust driver’s seat such that with the
driver sitting upright the steering wheel is
held in the area of its upper spokes with the
driver’s arms slightly bent.
82
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17055t.tif
Head restraints
The middle of the head restraint should be
at eye level. If this is not possible for
extremely tall persons, set to highest
position, and set to lowest position for
small persons.
9 Warning
Disregarding the instructions can lead to
injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle
passengers should be informed
accordingly before setting off.
Setting – see page 6 and right hand
column.
Picture no: 16976t.tif
Picture no: 17556j.tif
To adjust
front head restraints (all variants)
and outboard rear head restraints 3
To adjust, press button on side and adjust
height.
Adjusting the
rear head restraints 3 that are
integrated in the rear seat backrest
To adjust head restraints, pull forwards
with both hands and slide up or down.
In order to increase the size of the luggage
compartment or if they are not being used,
push rear head restraints down as far as
possible, see page 94.
To increase the size of the luggage
compartment or improve visibility, push
head restraint down as far as possible if
seat is unoccupied.
If seats are occupied, pull head restraints
upwards.
If seat is occupied, pull head restraint
upwards.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17056t.tif
Removing the head restraints
Press and release the two catches. Pull and
remove the head restraint.
In order to increase the size of the luggage
compartment or if they are not being used,
push rear head restraints down as far as
possible, see page 94.
Picture no: 17557j.tif
Armrest 3 between the front
seats
The armrest can be pushed forward. If the
armrest is not required, push it back.
Picture no: 17558j.tif
83
The armrest contains a stowage
compartment: to open, slide armrest back,
press button at front and lift.
84
Seats, Interior
Electrically adjustable front
seats 3
9 Warning
Care must be taken when operating the
electrically adjustable seats. There is a
risk of injury, particularly for children, and
a danger that articles could become
trapped.
Keep a close watch on the seats when
adjusting them.
Picture no: 17559j.tif
Rear seat armrest
The armrest can be folded down.
If the rear centre seat is being used or the
rear seat backrests are being folded down,
fold armrest upward.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
accordingly.
Picture no: 17579j.tif
Adjustment
The seat position can be adjusted by
means of switches on the outboard side of
the seats.
Adjusting the inclination
move switch 1 upwards/downwards at
front.
Seats, Interior
85
Adjusting the longitudinal position
move switch 1 forwards/backwards.
Height adjustment
move switch 1 upwards/downwards at
rear.
Seat back adjustment
turn switch 2 forwards/backwards.
Operate switch until desired seat position is
reached. Seat position – see page 81.
After adjusting the seat, adjust height of
seat belt – see page 109.
Picture no: 17580j.tif
Electrically operated lumbar support 3 on
driver’s seat
Adjust lumbar support using four-way
switch on outboard side of driver’s seat.
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal
requirements.
Moving support up and down: push button
up or down.
Increasing and decreasing support: push
button forward or backward.
Thigh support 3 on driver’s seat
see page 4.
Picture no: 17582j.tif
Memory function 3 for electrically
adjustable driver’s seat and exterior
mirrors
Three different seat and mirror settings can
be stored (e.g. for three drivers).
6
86
Seats, Interior
Readiness for operation
Storing settings
z With ignition on,
1. Adjust seat,
z within 10 minutes of switching ignition
off,
2. adjust exterior mirror – see page 6,
z within 10 minutes of opening or closing
the driver’s door,
z within 10 minutes of inserting or
removing the ignition key.
Readiness for operation stops when the
vehicle is locked.
3. press memory button M and the position
button to be used (1, 2 or 3)
simultaneously, and storage is
acknowledged by an acoustic signal.
Retrieving settings
Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the
stored seat and mirror positions have been
reached.
Store and activate the settings using the
remote controls 3
When the vehicle is locked using the radio
remote control the current driver’s seat and
exterior mirror positions are stored, see
page 64.
The seat adjusting procedure can be
stopped immediately by operating a
setting button.
Passenger side mirror with mirror parking
assistance 3
see page 6.
For reasons of safety, seat adjustment
stops immediately if the position button is
released or one of the setting buttons is
operated.
Overload
If the seat setting is electrically overloaded,
the power supply is automatically cut off
for a short time.
Adjustments may only be performed with
vehicle stationary.
The system is protected by fuses in the fuse
box – see page 246.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17560j.tif
Travel Assistant 3
The Travel Assistant Contains
z
z
z
z
z
z
Armrest
Stowage compartments
Waste container
Drink holders
Accessory sockets
Connection console
e.g. for DVD player 3
z Electric cool box
z Tables
z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or
stowage compartment
The Travel Assistant is installed on a
console above the middle seat in the rear.
Picture no: 17561j.tif
Installing The Travel Assistant
Swivel out retaining device on seat with
strap.
Insert the two rear retainers of the
connecting console in the retaining device
on the seat and engage.
87
Picture no: 17562j.tif
Swivel open and hold cover of front
attachment points in floor in front of
console.
6
88
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17563j.tif
Swivel connecting console downward and
engage in attachment points.
Picture no: 17564j.tif
Swivel the locking lever downwards.
Check the locking position of the Travel
Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J)
must not be visible. Otherwise, lock using
the key – see page 92, Fig. 17575 J.
Remove cap 3 from plug at securing
bracket.
Picture no: 17565j.tif
To lock, insert Travel Assistant into recesses
in connecting console and slide back as far
as possible.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17566j.tif
If it is correctly locked, the red mark must
no longer be visible in the window,
otherwise the procedure must be repeated.
9 Warning
If it is not correctly locked, the Travel
Assistant could be propelled forward with
considerable force when hard braking
occurs, risk of injury.
Picture no: 17567j.tif
Drink holder and accessory sockets
Open the drink holder by pressing the
marking.
Only accessories with maximum power
consumption of 120 Watts must be
connected to the accessory sockets. For
notes – see page 101.
89
Picture no: 17568j.tif
Stowage compartments
The lower stowage compartment is opened
by pressing the mark. The underside of the
compartment has an opening through
which objects in the compartment can be
raised.
The upper stowage compartment is
located under the armrest. To open, press
the button and fold the armrest upwards.
90
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17569j.tif
Connecting console for DVD player 3
When not in use, pull connecting console
upward, press button and slide downward.
Picture no: 17570j.tif
Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD
player display into bracket from below and
fix in position with bracket.
Maximum load: 1 kg.
Picture no: 17571j.tif
Electric cool box
To open, fold open the armrest together
with the stowage compartment.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17572j.tif
Switch on the cool box as needed.
Picture no: 17573j.tif
91
Picture no:
Tables
Fold armrest upward (1).
Set required clearance by adjusting
longitudinal position of table (4).
Use recessed grip to pull table upwards as
far as it will go (1), swivel table forward (2)
and fold downwards (3).
Swivel armrest down.
6
92
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17574j.tif
To fold away the table, swivel the armrest
up.
Push the table forward as far as it will
go (1).
Picture no:
Fold the table upwards past the resistance
point (2), swivel it downwards and insert in
the Travel Assistant (3).
Swivel armrest down.
Picture no: 17575j.tif
Dismantling the Travel Assistant
Open catch using key, red mark appears in
window.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17576j.tif
Pull the Travel Assistant to the front on the
connecting console and remove.
Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket.
Picture no: 17577j.tif
Press the locking lever down, press the
button on the front of the connecting
console and swivel the locking lever
upwards.
Picture no: 17578j.tif
93
Swivel the connecting console upward and
pull it from the retaining device on the seat.
Swivel the retaining device back on the
seat.
94
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17583j.tif
Luggage compartment extension
Fold down the cover behind the arm rest
Fold down the armrest on to the seat
cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover
forwards.
The outer seats can continue to be used for
passengers.
9 Warning
The load must not obstruct the operation
of the handbrake and the gears. Pay
attention to notes on page 100.
Engage the cover behind the centre
armrest audibly in position.
Picture no: 17584j.tif
Picture no: 17585j.tif
Cover behind armrest can be locked from
luggage compartment 3: turn handle 90°:
Folding down the rear seat backrests
Push the rear head restraints right down.
Locked
=
Unlocked =
Place the belt buckles in storage pockets in
the seat cushions.
Handle horizontal
Handle vertical
Slide front seat forward slightly.
Remove Travel Assistant 3 – see page 89.
Unlock one or both rear seat backrests by
depressing pushbuttons and fold down on
to seat cushion.
Return front seat to desired position.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17586j.tif
Restoring backrest to an upright position
Audibly engage the rear seat backrests.
There is a locking indicator on the release
lever. If the rear seat backrests have been
correctly locked the red indicator on the
release levers must not be visible.
Picture no: 17587j.tif
Folding down the front passenger seat 3
Push head restraint on front passenger’s
seat down as far as it will go.
Slide front passenger seat backwards.
Fold front passenger seat forward by
raising release lever.
To restore, press the release lever forward,
restore the front seat backrest to an
upright position and audibly engage.
Notes on loading
see page 100.
Picture no: 17588j.tif
95
Luggage compartment cover 3
5-door hatch
To remove, unhook the retaining straps
from the tailgate.
Pull cover from the side guides.
Fit in reverse order.
96
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17589j.tif
Picture no: 17590j.tif
Picture no: 17591j.tif
Estate
To close
Pull luggage compartment cover towards
rear of vehicle using handle and hook into
side retainers.
Removing
Open luggage compartment cover.
Safety net 3,
Estate
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged
objects on the cover.
Move release lever on right side of luggage
compartment cover upward. Lift right
cover and remove from brackets.
The safety net can be fitted behind the rear
seats or, with the rear seat backrests folded
down, behind the front seats.
Fitting
Fit the luggage compartment cover in the
bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the
release lever on the right-hand side, fit the
luggage compartment cover in the bracket
on the right-hand side and press the
release lever closed.
Passengers must not be carried behind the
safety net.
To open
Remove luggage compartment cover from
side brackets. It rolls up automatically.
Fitting behind the rear seats
Remove the luggage compartment cover see left column.
Fit the cassette with rolled safety net into
the side brackets and engage by twisting.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17592j.tif
Extend the net from the cassette. The roof
frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the
net rod in the fitting opening on one side
and then the other and engage by pushing
forward.
Fit the luggage compartment cover.
Picture no: 17593j.tif
97
Picture no: 17594j.tif
Removing
Remove the luggage compartment cover.
Pull each side hook from the cassette and
attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor.
Detach the safety net rod from the
brackets in the roof frame.
Slide both latches inwards; push the
cassette with rolled net rearwards in the
bracket, twist and remove upwards.
Extend the net from the cassette. The roof
frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the
net rod in the fitting opening on one side
and then the other and engage by pushing
forward.
Fitting behind front seats
Fold both rear seat backrests. Place the
rolled net on the floor behind the front
seats in such a way that the cog rail in the
slit on the net is to the rear.
Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the
vehicle floor.
Removing
Detach the safety net rod from the
brackets in the roof frame.
98
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17595j.tif
Picture no: 17596j.tif
Picture no: 17597j.tif
Lashing eyes
FlexOrganizer 3
The figures show some possible uses.
These enable cargo to be secured in
position in the luggage compartment using
lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3.
Flexible system for dividing the luggage
compartment or securing loads in an
estate.
Reversible carpet 3
The components are housed in a stowage
compartment at the rear in the load floor,
see page 104.
Variable partition wall
Fig. 17596 J. Press the rods of the partition
wall together slightly and engage in the
desired guide rail openings in the side
walls. The rods can be engaged in various
positions.
Folding floor covering with two different
surfaces. When transporting objects in the
luggage compartment, fold reversible
carpet with appropriate surface on top.
The system consists of
z variable partition net
z variable partition wall
z partition rod
z mesh pockets for the side walls
z hooks
The components can be mounted in the
two guide rails in the side walls of the
luggage compartment.
Variable partition net
Fig. 17597 J. Push rods of partition net
together a little and insert into relevant
openings in side wall guide rails. The rods
can be engaged in various positions. The
partition net can be installed horizontally
or vertically at different heights.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17598j.tif
Hooks and mesh pockets
for the side walls
Fig. 17598 J. Engage the hooks in the
openings of the guide rails in the side walls
as indicated in the figure and turn 90°. The
mesh pockets can be hung from the hooks.
Picture no: 17599j.tif
Removing
Press together the rods of the partition
wall/net or the telescopic rods and remove
from the guide rails. Turn the hooks 90°
and remove.
FlexOrganizer stowage
The FlexOrganizer components are housed
in a stowage compartment at the rear in
the load floor. To open, raise the handle
and open the flap – see page 104, Fig.
17611 J.
Picture no: 17600j.tif
99
To stow away, pull partition rods, partition
net rods and separate telescopic rod apart
in the middle and fold the two halves
together, see figure 17599 J. Roll up
partition and partition net and place in
compartment with other components.
Close lid.
100
Seats, Interior
Notes on loading the vehicle
z Objects must not be stored in the airbag
inflation area, because they could cause
injury if the airbag inflates.
z Heavy objects in the luggage
compartment should be placed against
the engaged rear seat backrests or, if the
rear seat backrests are folded down,
against the front seat backrests. If
objects are to be stacked, the heavier
objects should be placed at the bottom.
Unsecured objects in the luggage
compartment would be thrown forward
with great force in the event of heavy
braking, for example.
z Secure heavy objects with lashing
straps 3 attached to lashing eyes
– see page 98. If heavy loads slip when
the vehicle is braked heavily or driven
around a bend, the handling of the
vehicle may change.
z Saloon: loose objects in the luggage
compartment should be secured against
slipping using a luggage net 3
– see page 98.
z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when
transporting objects in the luggage
compartment. See page 96.
z Estate: close the luggage compartment
cover so there is no reflection in the rear
window.
z When transporting objects in the
luggage compartment the rear seats
must be engaged, see page 94.
z The load must not obstruct the operation
of the pedals, the handbrake or the
gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of
movement. Do not place loose objects in
the interior.
z Do not drive with luggage compartment
open when transporting bulky objects,
for example, since toxic exhaust fumes
could penetrate the interior.
Picture no: 17601j.tif
z Do not allow the load to protrude above
the upper edge of the rear seat
backrests, or above the upper edge of
the front seat backrests if the rear seat
backrests are folded down.
z Weights, payload and roof load – see
page 293.
z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3
must always be freely accessible.
z Driving with a roof load – see
pages 186, 189, 220, increases the
sensitivity of the vehicle to cross-winds
and has a detrimental effect on vehicle
handling owing to the vehicle’s higher
centre of gravity.
z Do not place any objects in front of the
rear window or on the instrument panel.
They are reflected in the glass, obstruct
the driver’s view and will be thrown
through the vehicle, for instance in the
event of heavy braking.
Failure to observe these descriptions can
lead to injuries which may be fatal.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
accordingly.
9 Warning
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17602j.tif
Picture no: 17603j.tif
Cigarette lighter 3
Accessory socket 3
In front centre console.
The socket in the centre console and the
cigarette lighter socket can be used to
connect electrical accessories. The sockets
are ready for operation when the ignition is
switched on. If the engine is not running the
battery will be discharged. An additional
accessory socket 3 can be found in the
centre console beneath the rear air vents
and in the Travel Assistant 3.
Press in cigarette lighter with ignition
switched on. Switches off automatically
once the element is glowing. Pull out
lighter.
Estates have an additional accessory
socket 3 to the left in the luggage
compartment next to the luggage
compartment lighting.
101
Picture no: 17604j.tif
Do not damage the sockets by using
unsuitable plugs.
The maximum power consumption of
electrical accessories must not exceed
120 watts.
Do not connect any current-delivering
accessories, e.g. electrical charging
devices or batteries.
Electrical accessories connected to the
socket must comply with the
electromagnetic compatibility
requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,
otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur.
Accessory sockets in the Travel
Assistant 3, see page 89.
102
Seats, Interior
Ashtray
Picture no: 17605j.tif
To be used only for ash and not for
combustible rubbish.
9 Warning
Failure to observe these descriptions can
lead to injuries which may be fatal.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
accordingly.
Ashtray, front
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated.
Picture no: 17606j.tif
To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray
insert at the spots illustrated and pull
upwards.
Picture no: 17607j.tif
Rear ashtray 3
In the rear centre console.
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated.
To empty: open the ashtray, press the
spring (arrow) and pull out the ashtray.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17608j.tif
Stowage compartments
Glove compartment
To open, pull handle upwards.
At the front of the opened cover there is a
pen holder.
Cooled glove compartment 3
– see page 146.
Picture no: 17614j.tif
Centre console stowage compartment 3
Division of the stowage compartment can
be changed by moving the partition in the
side guides.
103
Picture no: 17609j.tif
Stowage compartment in the roof lining 3
To open, press the point indicated.
The maximum permitted load on the
stowage compartment is 0.4 kg.
The stowage compartment must be closed
whilst driving.
104
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17610j.tif
Stowage compartments in the luggage
compartment
To access press down bar and open the
cover.
Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3
stowage – see page 234. Stowing the spare
wheel – see page 236. Jack and vehicle
tools stowage – see page 238.
Picture no: 17611j.tif
Estates have an additional stowage
compartment in the load compartment
floor.
To open, pull the release lever and open
the flap.
Picture no: 17612j.tif
When opening, ensure that the hinge at the
fold is opened and that the entire floor
covering is not raised.
Seats, Interior
105
Sun visors
Use the sun visor to protect from glare by
pulling it down and swivelling it to the side.
Picture no: 17613j.tif
Drink holders
Drink holders, front 3
The drink holder can be found between the
front seats in the centre console: slide
cover 3 open.
Picture no: 17615j.tif
Drinks holders, rear 3
The drink holder can be found beneath the
centre seat: pressing front edge moves
drink holder out.
Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3
– see page 89.
106
Safety systems
Safety systems
Three-stage safety system
Comprising:
z Three-point seat belts.
z Belt tensioners at the front seats.
Seat belts..............................................
Three-point seat belts .........................
Belt tensioners......................................
Using the belts .....................................
Testing the belts ..................................
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system .......
Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX child
restraint systems ...............................
Child restraint systems 3 ....................
Exterior mirrors.....................................
Aspherical exterior mirror 3 ...............
Automatic anti-dazzle interior
mirror 3 and exterior mirror 3 on
the driver’s side .................................
Sun visors, glove compartment ..........
Head restraints ....................................
Safety accessories 3 ...........................
107
107
107
109
110
111
123
124
126
126
126
126
127
127
z Airbag systems for driver, front
passenger and outboard rear seats 3.
The three stages are activated in sequence
depending on the severity of the accident:
z The automatic seat belt locking devices
prevent the belt strap from being pulled
out and thus ensure that the vehicle
occupants are retained in their seats.
z The front seat belt buckles are pulled
downwards. As a result, the seat belts
are instantaneously tightened and the
occupants decelerate with the vehicle at
a very early stage, which reduces the
stress placed on the body.
z The airbag systems are also triggered in
the event of serious accidents and form a
safety cushion for the occupants.
Depending on the severity of the
accident, the front airbags inflate in two
stages.
9 Warning
The airbag systems serve to supplement
the three-point seat belts and belt
tensioners. The seat belts must therefore
always be worn. Disregard of these
instructions may lead to injuries or
endanger life. Vehicle passengers should
be informed accordingly.
Please read the instructions provided with
the child restraint system!
Safety systems
107
Seat belts
9 Warning
Always wear your seat belt, and that
means also in urban traffic and when you
are a rear seat passenger. It can save
your life!
Pregnant women must always wear a
seat belt – see page 109.
In the event of an accident, persons not
wearing seat belts endanger their fellow
occupants and themselves.
Picture no: 17515j.tif
Control indicator X for the seat belt – see
page 36.
For information on correct seating
position – see pages 81, 110, 113.
Seat belts are only intended for one person.
They are not suitable for anyone under
12 years of age or under 150 cm tall.
The belt has a "vehicle sensitive retractor"
which is designed to lock during heavy
acceleration or deceleration in any
direction.
For children up to 12 years of age, we
recommend the Vauxhall child restraint
system – see page 124.
Three-point seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with three-point
seat belts with automatic retractors and
locking devices, allowing freedom of body
movement although the spring tensioned
belts always ensure a snug fit.
Belt tensioners
The front seat belt systems are equipped
with belt tensioners. In the event of a headon or rear-end collision of a certain
severity, the belt buckles are pulled down,
therefore tightening the belts.
Picture no: 17616j.tif
Actuation of belt tensioners
is indicated by illumination of control
indicator v, see next page.
The belt tensioners must be replaced after
activation. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
If the seat belts are undamaged the
operation thereof is unaffected, even if the
belt tensioners have been triggered.
Further information – see page 110.
108
Safety systems
9 Warning
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The system’s integrated self-diagnostics
allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have
your Car Pass on hand when consulting a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17617j.tif
Control indicator v for belt tensioners
The operation of the belt tensioners is
electronically monitored together with the
airbag systems and indicated on the
instrument panel by the control
indicator v. When the ignition is switched
on, the control indicator illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,
does not go off after 4 seconds or
illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in
the belt tensioner system or the airbag
systems, see page 117. The belt tensioner
or the airbag systems may not activate if
an accident occurs.
Deployment of the belt tensioners is
indicated by continuous illumination of v.
If control indicator v in the instrument
panel fails, for reasons of safety, the text
AIrbAG appears in the odometer display.
Pressing the reset button will cause the text
to disappear. It then reappears in the
odometer display 10 seconds later.
Important
z Accessories and other objects not
specifically approved for your vehicle
type must not be affixed or placed within
the action zone of the belt tensioners
(near the belt buckles) as this could
result in injury if the belt tensioners are
triggered.
z Do not make any modifications to the
components of the belt tensioners, as
this will render the vehicle unroadworthy.
9 Warning
Improper handling (e.g. removal or
installation) can activate the belt
tensioners risk of injury.
z The belt tensioner and airbag system
control electronics can be found in the
centre console area. In order to avoid
malfunctions, do not store magnetic
objects in this area.
z We recommend that you have the front
seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z The belt tensioners only actuate once.
Please replace belt tensioners that have
been triggered. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z Applicable safety directives must always
be observed when disposing of the
vehicle. For this reason, disposal should
be performed by an authorised recycling
company. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17106t.tif
Using the belts
Fitting seat belts
Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide
it across the body, making certain that it is
not twisted.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The
front seat backrest must not be tilted back
too far or the seat belt will not operate
properly. The recommended angle of
inclination is 25°. Make sure that the lap
belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly
across the body. Tension the belt
frequently while driving by tugging the
diagonal part of the belt.
Picture no: 17107t.tif
9 Warning
On pregnant women in particular, the lap
belt must be positioned as low as
possible across the pelvis so as not to put
too much pressure on the abdomen.
Bulky clothing prevents the belt from fitting
properly. The belt must not rest against
hard or fragile objects in the pockets of
your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys,
spectacles) because these could cause
injury. Do not place any objects (e.g.
handbags, mobile phones) between the
belt and your body.
109
Picture no: 17618j.tif
Height adjustment
of seat belt upper anchorage point:
1. Pull belt out slightly.
2. Front seat belts
Push button down or slide belt guide up.
Rear seat belts
Push belt guide and slide it upwards or
downwards.
3. Set desired height.
4. Allow belt guide to audibly engage.
Do not adjust height while driving.
6
110
Safety systems
Testing the belts
Please check all parts of the belt system
occasionally for damage and correct
operation. Have damaged parts replaced.
In case of an accident, please replace
overstretched belts and triggered belt
tensioners. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Do not perform any alterations on the
belts, their anchorages, the automatic
retractors or the belt buckles.
Picture no: 17515j.tif
Adjust height such that the belt passes
over the wearer’s shoulder and rests
against the shoulder. It must not pass over
the neck or upper arm.
Picture no: 17109t.tif
Removing the belt
To remove the belt, depress the red
pushbutton on the buckle; the belt will
retract automatically.
Make sure that belts are not damaged or
trapped by sharp-edged objects.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17619j.tif
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system
The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system
comprises several individual systems.
Front airbag system
The front airbag system will be triggered in
the event of a serious accident involving a
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
Picture no: 17110t.tif
Side airbag system 3
The side airbag is triggered in the event of
a side-on collision to form a safety cushion
for the driver or front passenger in the
respective door area. This substantially
reduces the risk of injury to the upper body
and pelvis.
Picture no: 17620j.tif
111
Curtain airbag system 3
The curtain airbag system triggers in case
of a side-on collision and provides a safety
barrier in the head area on the respective
side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
injury to the head considerably in case of a
side-on collision.
112
Safety systems
Exception:
Passenger seat with seat occupancy
recognition system 3. The seat occupancy
recognition system deactivates the front
and side airbags on the passenger side if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a
Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 has been fitted to the front
passenger seat. Seat occupancy
recognition – see page 118. Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3
– see page 124.
Picture no: 17111t.tif
Picture no: 17621j.tif
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system
z seat occupancy recognition 3,
Front airbag
The front airbag system is identified by the
word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and
above the glove compartment.
z the control indicator for Vauxhall child
restraint systems y with transponders 3
in the instrument panel.
The front airbag system comprises:
z an airbag with inflator in the steering
wheel and a second one in the
instrument panel,
z control electronics with impact sensors,
z the airbag systems control indicator v in
the instrument panel,
The front airbag system will be triggered:
z depending on the severity of the
accident,
z depending on the type of impact,
z within the range shown in the illustration,
z independent of side airbag and curtain
airbag system 3.
Examples of events triggering the front
airbag system:
z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle:
the front airbags are triggered at low
vehicle speed.
z Impact against a yielding obstacle:
(such as another vehicle): the front
airbags are only triggered at a higher
vehicle speed.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17619j.tif
Picture no: 17350t.tif
No impairment of view will occur, because
the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly
that it is often not even noticed in an
accident.
The front airbag system provides
optimum protection when the seat,
backrest and head restraint are correctly
adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat
according to the occupant’s height such
that with the driver sitting upright the
steering wheel is held in the area of its
upper spokes with the driver’s arms
slightly bent. The front passenger’s seat
should be as far back as possible, with
the backrest upright – see pages 3, 81.
Do not place the head, body, hands or
feet on the covers of the airbag systems.
When triggered, the front airbags inflate in
milliseconds to form a safety cushion for
the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the front seat
occupants is checked, thereby
substantially reducing the risk of injury to
the upper body and head.
9 Warning
Do not place any objects in the area in
which the airbags inflate. Important
information – see page 120.
113
Picture no: 17515j.tif
9 Warning
The three-point seat belt must be
correctly fitted – see page 109.
The front airbag system will not be
triggered in the event of
z the ignition is switched off,
z minor frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a side or rear impact,
that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to
the occupants.
6
114
Safety systems
9 Warning
Seat belts must therefore always be worn.
The front airbag system serves to
supplement the three-point seat belts. If
you do not wear your seat belt you risk
being seriously injured, or even thrown
from the vehicle, in the event of an
accident.
In the event of an accident the belt helps
to keep you in the correct seating
position, so that the front airbag system
can provide you with effective protection.
In addition, the front airbag system will not
be triggered for the front passenger in
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3
if
z the front passenger seat is unoccupied,
z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3.
Seat occupancy recognition – see
page 118. Vauxhall child restraint
system with transponders 3 – see
page 124.
Picture no: 17622j.tif
Side airbag 3
The side airbag system is identified by the
word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the
front seat backrests.
The side airbag system comprises:
z an airbag with inflator in the back of the
driver’s and front passenger seat
respectively,
z the control electronics,
z the side impact sensors,
z the airbag systems control indicator v in
the instrument panel,
z seat occupancy recognition 3,
z the control indicator for Vauxhall child
restraint systems y with transponders 3
in the instrument panel.
Picture no: 17623j.tif
The side airbag system will be triggered:
z depending on the severity of the
accident,
z depending on the type of impact,
z within the range shown in the illustration
on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or
front passenger side,
z independently of the front airbag
system.
Exception:
Passenger seat with seat occupancy
recognition system 3. The seat occupancy
recognition system deactivates the
passenger front and side airbags if the
passenger seat is unoccupied or a
Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 has been fitted to the
passenger seat. Seat occupancy
recognition – see page 118. Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3
– see page 124.
Safety systems
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in
which the airbag inflates or in the area
between the backrests and the vehicle
body. Do not place the hands or arms on
the covers of the airbag systems.
Important information – see page 120.
The three-point seat belt must always be
correctly fitted – see page 109.
Picture no: 17110t.tif
When triggered, the side airbag inflates
within milliseconds to form a safety cushion
for the driver or front passenger in the
respective door area. This substantially
reduces the risk of injury to the upper body
and pelvis in the event of a side-on
collision.
The side airbags will not be triggered in the
event of
z the ignition is switched off,
z frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a rear impact,
z collisions involving a side impact outside
the passenger cell.
115
In addition, the side airbag system will not
be triggered for the front passenger in
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3
if
z the front passenger seat is unoccupied,
z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3.
Seat occupancy recognition
– see page 118. Vauxhall child restraint
system with transponders 3
– see page 124.
116
Safety systems
Picture no: 17624j.tif
Picture no: 17623j.tif
Curtain airbag 3
The curtain airbag system is identified by
the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.
The curtain airbag system will be triggered:
The curtain airbag system comprises:
z depending on the type of impact,
z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame
on the driver’s and front passenger side
respectively,
z the control electronics,
z the side impact sensors,
z the airbag systems control indicator v in
the instrument panel.
z depending on the severity of the
accident,
z within the range shown in the illustration
on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or
front passenger side,
z together with the side airbag system,
z irrespective of seat occupancy
recognition,
z independently of the front airbag
system.
Picture no: 17620j.tif
When the curtain airbag is triggered it
inflates within milliseconds and provides a
safety barrier in the head area on the
respective side of the vehicle. This reduces
the risk of injury to the head considerably in
case of a side impact.
Safety systems
9 Warning
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in
which the airbag inflates. Do not place
the hands or arms on the covers of the
airbag systems. Important information
– see page 120.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The system’s integrated self-diagnostics
allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have
your Car Pass on hand when consulting a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The three-point seat belt must always be
correctly fitted – see page 109.
The curtain airbags will not be triggered in
the event of
z the ignition is switched off,
z frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a rear impact,
z collisions involving a side impact outside
the passenger cell.
117
Picture no: 17617j.tif
Control indicator v for airbag systems
The operation of the airbag systems is
electronically monitored together with the
seat occupancy recognition systems 3 and
the belt tensioners and indicated on the
instrument panel by the control
indicator v. When the ignition is switched
on, the control indicator illuminates for
approx.4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,
does not go off after 4 seconds or
illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in
the airbag systems, the seat occupancy
recognition system 3 or the belt tensioners,
see page 108. The systems may not
activate if an accident occurs.
Deployed airbags are indicated by
continuous illumination of v.
If control indicator v in the instrument
panel fails, for reasons of safety, the text
AIrbAG appears in the odometer display.
The text is acknowledged by pressing the
reset button. It then disappears from the
odometer display 10 seconds later.
118
Safety systems
Seat occupancy recognition 3
The seat occupancy recognition system
deactivates the front and side airbags for
the front passenger if the front passenger
seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3 is
fitted on the front passenger seat. The
curtain airbag system 3 remains activated.
The control indicator for seat occupancy
recognition y is located in the instrument
panel. If control indicator y illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is
switched on, the vehicle is equipped with
seat occupancy recognition; see next
page, Fig. 17626 J.
If a Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 is installed, the control
indicator y illuminates continuously as
soon as the system has detected the child
restraint system when the ignition is
switched on. Only then can a child restraint
system be used on the front passenger
seat.
9 Warning
Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passenger seats. Use of systems without
transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be identified by a
sticker.
Picture no: 17625j.tif
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
can also be identified by the sticker on the
side of the instrument panel, see figure
above.
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 are automatically
detected if correctly fitted to the front
passenger seat. When these child restraint
systems are being used on the front
passenger seat, the front and side airbag
systems for the front passenger seat are
deactivated. The curtain airbag system
remains activated. Pay attention to control
indicator seat y for occupancy
recognition 3, see page 119.
Safety systems
Control indicator y for Vauxhall
child restraint systems with
transponders 3
The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint
system with transponders 3 is indicated by
the steady glow of control indicator y in
the instrument panel once the ignition has
been switched on and the seat occupancy
recognition system has detected the child
restraint system.
119
If the control indicator flashes even though
there is correctly installed child restraint
system with transponders 3, there is a fault
and risk of injury to the child. Fit child
restraint system to rear seat. Have the
cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17626j.tif
If the control indicator does not illuminate
whilst driving, the front and side airbag
have not been deactivated on the
passenger side. Risk of fatal injury to the
child – fit child restraint system to rear seat.
Have cause of fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
If the child restraint system is not correctly
fitted or the transponders are defective the
control indicator flashes. Check that child
restraint system is correctly fitted. For
fitting child restraint system with
transponders 3, see instructions provided
with child restraint system.
If no Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 is installed, the control
indicator must neither illuminate nor flash,
since this indicates that the front
passenger airbag systems would not be
triggered. Have the cause of fault
remedied. We recommend that you consult
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
9 Warning
If the Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 has been fitted
according to the instructions, the control
indicator for Vauxhall restraint systems
with transponders must illuminate in the
instrument panel when the ignition is
switched on.
If the control indicator does not illuminate
whilst driving, the airbag systems have
not been deactivated on the passenger
side. Risk of fatal injury. In this case, fit
child restraint system to rear seat. Have
cause of fault remedied. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
120
Safety systems
Important
z Do not fit accessories or place objects in
the expansion zone of the airbag
systems - risk of injury if airbags are
deployed.
z Do not place any objects between the
airbag systems and the vehicle
occupants; danger of injury.
9 Warning
Never carry child restraint systems or
other objects on your lap - risk of fatal
injury.
z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to
hang up light articles of clothing or coat
hangers. Do not place any objects in the
pockets of the hanging items – risk of
injury.
z The airbag systems and belt tensioner
control electronics can be found in the
centre console area. In order to avoid
malfunctions, do not store magnetic
objects in this area.
z Do not stick anything on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, front seat
backrests or roof frame in the vicinity of
the airbags, or on the front passenger
seat cushion, or cover any of those areas
with other materials.
z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to
clean the steering wheel, instrument
panel, front seat backrests, roof frame
and seat cushion of the front passenger
seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning
agents.
z Only protective covers which are
approved for your Vectra with side
airbag may be fitted on the front seats.
When fitting the protective covers, make
sure that the airbag units on the
outboard sides of the front seat
backrests are not covered.
z The airbag systems are triggered
independently of each other based on
the severity of the accident and the type
of impact. The side airbag system 3 and
the curtain airbag system 3 are
triggered together.
z Each airbag can be triggered only once.
Once triggered, an airbag must be
replaced without delay. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
z The speeds, directions of movement and
deformation properties of the vehicles,
and the properties of the obstacle
concerned, determine the severity of the
accident and triggering of the airbags.
The degree of damage to your vehicle
and the resulting repair costs alone are
not indicative that the criteria for
triggering of the airbags were met.
z Do not perform any alterations on the
components of the airbag system, as this
would render the vehicle unroadworthy.
9 Warning
The systems can be triggered abruptly
and cause injury if they are handled
improperly.
z We recommend having the steering
wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling
parts, the door seals, the handles and
the seats removed by your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
z Applicable safety directives must always
be observed when disposing of the
vehicle. For this reason, disposal should
be performed by an authorised recycling
company. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should
only travel on the rear seats. This does
not apply to children who are travelling
in child restraint systems with
transponders 3.
Safety systems
z In vehicles with seat occupancy
recognition 3, do not place any heavy
objects on the front passenger seat
otherwise the airbag systems for the
front passenger seat may be triggered in
the event of an accident.
9 Warning
z In vehicles with seat occupancy
recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions
do not use protective covers or seat
cushions on the front passenger seat.
z In order to prevent malfunctions when
using a Vauxhall child restraint system
with transponders 3 on the front
passenger seat, no objects (e.g. plastic
sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be
placed under the child restraint system.
9 Warning
Child restraint systems as well as other
objects must never be carried on the lap
of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If
carried in this way, child restraint systems
with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat
occupancy recognition 3 could lead to
front passenger airbag systems not
being triggered in the event of an
accident.
121
Picture no: 17424t.tif
Use of child restraint systems 3 on the
front passenger seat in vehicles
with airbag systems 3, but
without seat occupancy recognition 3
Vehicles with passenger airbag and no
side airbag 3: child seats facing the rear
of the vehicle must not be fitted to the
passenger seat, risk of fatal injury. Child
seats facing the front (child safety seats
for weight ranges I, II and III – see
following pages) are permitted on the
passenger seat, providing that it is
pushed back as far as possible and the
backrest has been adjusted so that the
lap belt fits snugly.
122
Safety systems
Picture no: 17118t.tif
Vehicles with front passenger airbag can
be recognised by the word AIRBAG above
the glove compartment and the warning
sticker on the sun visor of the passenger
seat - see Fig. 17424 T. In some versions1),
the warning sticker may be on the side of
the instrument panel - see Fig. 17118 T.
Picture no: 17627j.tif
9 Warning
Vehicles with side airbag 3: No child
restraint system 3 may be fitted on the
front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury.
A vehicle with side airbags can be
identified by the word AIRBAG on the
outboard sides of the front seat backrests.
Seat occupancy recognition 3
– see page 118.
1)
Country-specific version.
Picture no: 17625j.tif
Use of child restraint systems 3 on
front passenger seat in vehicles
with airbag systems 3 and
with seat occupancy recognition 3
9 Warning
Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passenger seats. Use of systems without
transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
Safety systems
123
Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX
child restraint systems
The brackets located between the backrest
and seat cushion are used for mounting
ISOFIX child restraint systems.
Please follow the instructions
accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint
system.
Only ISOFIX child restraint systems
approved for the vehicle may be used. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17626j.tif
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
can be identified by the control
indicator y in the instrument panel. If the
control indicator y illuminates for approx.
4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the vehicle is equipped with seat
occupancy recognition – see page 118.
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
can also be identified by the sticker on the
side of the instrument panel, see
Fig. 17625 J.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Vauxhall child restraint systems
with transponders 3 and switches off the
front and side airbag systems for the front
passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag
system remains activated. Seat occupancy
recognition – see page 118.
Picture no: 17424t.tif
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be identified by a
sticker or badge.
124
Safety systems
Child restraint systems 3
The Vauxhall child restraint system is
designed specifically for your Vauxhall and
thus provides optimum safety for your child
in the event of impact. If a different child
safety seat is used, follow the
manufacturers’ instructions for fitting and
use.
The country in which you are travelling
may not permit the use of child restraint
systems on certain seats. Always comply
with the local or national regulations.
Selecting the right system
Your child should be transported facing
rearward in the car as long as possible.
Change the system when the height of the
child is such that the head extends over the
top of the system and is no longer
supported at eye level. The child’s cervical
vertebrae are still very weak. In the event of
an accident, they are subjected to less
stress in the semi-prone rearward position
than when upright.
9 Warning
Never carry child restraint systems on
your lap, risk of fatal injury.
Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1)
Weight
and
age class2)
0:
up to 10 kg
or approx.
10 months
On
front passenger seat
On
outboard rear seats
On
centre rear seat
B 1, +
U, +
U
B 2, +
U, +
U
X
U
U
0+:
up to 13 kg
or approx.
2 years
I:
9 to 18 kg
or approx.
8 months to
4 years
II:
15 to 25 kg
or approx.
3 to 7 years
III:
22 to 36 kg
or approx.
6 to 12 years
1)
2)
For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed on
one of the outboard rear seats.
We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit.
Safety systems
B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
recognition and Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders.
If the child restraint system is being
secured using a three-point seat
belt, move seat height adjustment 3
to uppermost position. Move front
passenger seat as far back as
possible and move front passenger
seat belt anchorage point to lowest
position.
B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
recognition and Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders.
If the child restraint system is being
secured using a three-point seat
belt, move seat height adjustment 3
to uppermost position. Move front
passenger seat as far back as
possible so that vehicle safety belt
runs from anchorage point towards
the front.
U = Can be used universally in
combination with a three-point seat
belt.
+
= Vehicle seat with ISOFIX mounting
available. When mounting with
ISOFIX, only ISOFIX child restraint
systems that have been approved
for the vehicle may be used. We
recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
X = No child restraint system permitted.
125
Note
z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm
tall should only travel in an appropriate
child safety seat.
z When transporting children, use the child
restraint systems suitable for the child’s
weight.
z Ensure that the child restraint system has
been correctly fitted, see instructions
provided with child restraint system.
z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint
system can be wiped clean.
z Do not stick anything on the child
restraint systems and do not cover them
with any other materials.
z Only allow the child to enter and exit on
the side of the vehicle facing away from
the road.
z A child restraint system which has been
subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced.
126
Safety systems
The mirrors do not dip to prevent dazzle if:
z the ignition is switched off,
z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever
set to R,
z the interior lights are on,
z a door is open.
Adjusting interior and exterior mirrors
– see page 6.
Automatically regulated centre console
lighting, see page 134.
Picture no: 17628j.tif
Exterior mirrors
For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior
mirrors will swing out of their normal
mounting position if they are bumped with
sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by
applying slight pressure to the mirror
housing.
Aspherical exterior mirror 3
increases the field of view. Estimating the
distance away of vehicles following you is
only possible to a limited extent because of
slight distortion.
Picture no: 17629j.tif
Automatic anti-dazzle interior
mirror 3 and exterior mirror 3
on the driver’s side
Dazzle at night is automatically reduced.
For vehicles with position memory for
electrically operated front seats 3 the
sensor is in the top right-hand side of the
mirror.
Sun visors, glove compartment
The mirror covers in the sun visors and the
glove compartment should be closed whilst
driving.
Safety systems
127
Head restraints
Safety accessories 3
Adjust head restraints in accordance with
height 3, see pages 5, 82.
The wide range of Vauxhall accessories
allows you to equip your Vectra in
accordance with your own wishes. In
addition to safety accessories, items for
improving comfort and a complete range
of vehicle care products you will find many
articles which will be of great value to you
when needed.
Do not attach objects or components that
are not approved for the Vectra to the
head restraints. These affect the protective
effect of the head restraints and can be
propelled through the vehicle in an
uncontrolled manner if the driver brakes
hard or an accident occurs.
"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"
are the guarantee of top quality and an
accurate fit.
Picture no: 17011t.tif
Active head restraints 3
In the event of a rear-end impact, the
active head restraints automatically tilt
forwards. The head is more effectively
supported by the head restraint and the
danger of whiplash in the area of the neck
is reduced.
Active head restraints are identified by the
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint
guide sleeves.
Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be
happy to advise you, for example with
regard to:
z Vauxhall child restraint systems,
z Tow ropes,
z Tow rods,
z Jump leads,
z Spare bulb kit,
z Spare fuse kit,
z Halogen fog lights,
z Mud flaps,
z Warning triangle,
z First-aid kit,
z First-aid kit (cushion).
128
Lighting
Lighting
Versions with daytime running lights 3:
Parking lights are on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to 7
or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the
engine is running.
The daytime running lights switch off when
the ignition is switched off.
Automatic dipped beam activation 3
Fog lights > 3 .....................................
Fog tail light r ....................................
Turn signals, hazard warning flashers
Reversing lights....................................
Headlight range adjustment ? ..........
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) ..
Door-to-door illumination ...................
Parking lights .......................................
Instrument illumination k,
Information display illumination......
Courtesy light .......................................
Battery discharge protection..............
Light covers..........................................
Headlights when driving abroad .......
129
130
130
130
130
129
131
132
132
133
133
134
134
135
Follow the regulations of the country in
which you are driving when using daytime
running lights and fog lights 3.
Picture no: 17122t.tif
Exterior lights
Turn light switch:
7 = Off
8 = Parking lights
9 = Dipped beam, main beam
Dipped beam, main beam and headlight
flash, see pages 14.
In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and
number plate lights are also on.
If the ignition is switched off with the
dipped beam or main beam on, the
parking lights illuminate 3 and the dipped
beam switch off.
The rear lights of the estate automatically
switch themselves off after 10 minutes if
the luggage compartment is open and the
vehicle is stationary.
Driving abroad – see page 135.
Lighting
129
Vehicles without automatic level control
z Front seats occupied
=
0
z All seats occupied
=
1
z All seats occupied and
luggage compartment load =
2
z Driver’s seat occupied and
luggage compartment load =
3
Vehicles with automatic level control 3
Picture no: 17123t.tif
Automatic dipped beam
activation 3
Light switch to AUTO: Dipped beam
switches on or off automatically when the
engine is running based on outside light
conditions.
The exterior lights are turned off by
removing the ignition key.
For reasons of safety, the light switch
should always remain in the AUTO
position.
z Front seats occupied
=
0
z All seats occupied
=
0
Picture no: 17125t.tif
z All seats occupied and
luggage compartment load =
0
Manual headlight range adjustment 3
With dipped beam switched on, push to
release knob and adjust headlight range in
four steps to suit vehicle load. Turn wheel
against resistance and click it to the
required position.
z Driver’s seat occupied and
luggage compartment load =
1
Headlight range adjustment ?
Correct adjustment of the headlight range
reduces dazzle for other road users.
Level control system – see page 206.
Automatic headlight range adjustment 3
On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the
range of the headlights is adjusted
automatically based on vehicle load.
130
Lighting
Fog tail light r
On =
Off =
Press r, r illuminates
in instrument panel
Press r again or
switch ignition or light off
The fog tail light can only be switched on
when the ignition is on and dipped beam or
parking lights are on or if the light switch is
in the AUTO 3 position and dipped beam
is active.
Picture no: 17124t.tif
Fog lights > 3
On =
Off =
Press >, > illuminates
in instrument panel
Press > again or
switch ignition or light off
The fog lights can only be switched on
when both the ignition and lights are on.
The fog tail lights of the vehicle are
deactivated when towing a caravan/
trailer.
Turn signals, hazard warning
flashers
see pages 14, 15.
Reversing lights
Come on when reverse gear is engaged
and ignition is switched on.
Lighting
Picture no: 17793j.tif
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3
(AFL)
On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights,
improves illumination of
z curves (curve lighting),
z intersections and tight turns (turn
lighting).
Curve lighting 1
The Xenon light beam pivots based on
steering wheel position and speed (from
approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h).
The headlights shine at an angle of up to
15° to the right or left of the direction of
travel.
Picture no:
Turn lighting 2
An additional light comes on at certain
steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°),
turn signal settings and speeds (up to
approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h).
The light shines approx. 90° to the left or
right of the vehicle and approx. 30 metres
to the front.
Motorway lighting
At higher speeds and continuous straight
ahead travel, the dipped beam
automatically raises slightly, thereby
increasing headlight range.
131
Picture no: 17630j.tif
Control indicator B
Lights: Fault in system. The system is not
ready for operation.
If the curve lighting swivelling device fails,
the relevant dipped beam is switched off.
The corresponding fog light is automatically switched on for reasons of safety.
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
If control indicator B illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the headlights have been set
to symmetrical dipped beam, see
"Headlights when driving abroad",
page 135.
132
Lighting
If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will
go out after two minutes.
The light is switched off immediately by
inserting the key into the ignition or pulling
the turn signal stalk again with the driver’s
door open.
Picture no: 17128t.tif
Picture no: 17129t.tif
Door-to-door illumination
Parking lights
The dipped beam and the reversing lights
illuminate for approx. 30 seconds after the
driver has exited the vehicle and closed his
door.
The front parking light and tail light of one
side of the vehicle can be activated when
parking:
To activate function:
1. Switch off ignition.
2. Ignition off.
2. Remove ignition key.
3. Open driver’s door.
4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering
wheel.
5. Close driver’s door.
1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3.
3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up
(right parking light) or down (left parking
light).
An acoustic signal sounds and control
indicator O illuminates briefly in the
instrument panel to indicate activation.
Remove the ignition key before leaving the
vehicle.
To switch it off, switch on the ignition or
move the turn signal stalk in the opposite
direction.
Lighting
Picture no: 17130t.tif
Instrument illumination k,
Information display illumination
Brightness can be adjusted when the
exterior lights are on: Push to release
knob k and then turn it clockwise or
anticlockwise and hold until the desired
brightness is obtained.
Display mode 3 – see page 54.
Picture no: 17631j.tif
Courtesy light
Front courtesy light
Comes on automatically when the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote control, when a
door is opened or after switching off the
ignition and removing the key from the
ignition switch.
Goes off automatically with delay after the
doors are closed or immediately when the
ignition is switched on or the doors are
locked.
Manual operation from inside with doors
closed:
On =
Off =
Press button c
Press button c again
Picture no: 17632j.tif
133
Front reading lights 3
Left and right reading lights are
individually operable. With ignition on:
On =
Off =
Press button a
Press button a again
134
Lighting
Entry lighting 3
After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument
and switch illumination as well as the
courtesy lights come on for a few seconds.
Illuminated mirror in the sun visors 3
The lighting switches on when the cover is
opened.
Glove compartment lighting
Glove compartment is illuminated when lid
is open and ignition on.
Picture no: 17133t.tif
Cigarette lighter and ashtray
illumination 3
Comes on when ignition is switched on.
Courtesy lights and
rear reading lights 3
Centre switch position: The rear courtesy
light comes on together with the front one
when a door is opened.
Luggage compartment lighting 3
Comes on when the boot lid/tailgate is
opened.
The rear reading lights on the left and right
can be switched on separately. With
ignition on:
Automatically regulated centre console
lighting 3
Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.
On =
Off =
Daylight-dependent, automatically
regulated centre console lighting with
ignition switched on.
Switch position I
Switch position 0
Battery discharge protection
To prevent the battery from becoming
discharged, the courtesy light, reading
lights, luggage compartment lighting and
glove compartment lighting switch off
automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is
switched off.
Light covers
The inside of the light covers may become
misted up for a short period during
unfavourable weather conditions, heavy
rain or after washing the vehicle. The
misting disappears automatically after a
short time, but can be speeded up by
switching the lights on.
Lighting
Headlights when driving abroad
The asymmetrical dipped beam increases
the field of vision on the passenger side of
the lane.
This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the
vehicle is driven in countries where traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road.
Do as follows to prevent glare:
Vehicles with
halogen headlight system or
xenon headlight system, without
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL)
Have the headlights adjusted by a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
135
Vehicles with Adaptive Forward
Lighting 3 (AFL)
1. Open fuse box cover in engine
compartment, see page 250.
2. Insert any fuse (maxi-fuse) 3 in slot 37.
Fuse assignment – see page 251.
3. Close fuse box.
4. Switch on ignition.
Then the AFL control indicator B
illuminates for 4 seconds whenever the
ignition is switched on.
Control indicator B, see pages 38, 131.
136
Windows, Sun Roof
Windows, Sun Roof
9 Warning
Caution when operating the electric
windows 3 and the electric sun roof 3.
Risk of injury, particularly to children.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
accordingly.
If there are children on the rear seat,
switch on the child safety system 3 for
the electric windows.
Electric windows 3...............................
Windows in rear doors ........................
Sun roof 3 ............................................
Electrically operated rear window
blind 3 ...............................................
Roller blinds at rear door windows 3.
136
138
139
141
141
Keep a close watch on the windows and
sun roof when closing them. Ensure that
nothing becomes trapped in them as
they move.
Electric windows 3
The electric windows can be used
z with ignition on,
z within 10 minutes of switching ignition
off,
z within 10 minutes of opening or closing
the driver’s door,
z within 10 minutes of inserting or
removing the ignition key.
Readiness for operation stops when the
vehicle is locked.
Windows, Sun Roof
Picture no: 17868j.tif
Operation via 2 rocker buttons in the
driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in
the front passenger door and the rear
doors 3.
To operate window in stages, tap switch.
For automatic opening or closing, keep
switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop
window movement, tap switch again.
Picture no: 17869j.tif
Vehicles with rear 3 electric windows have
a slide switch between the buttons in the
driver’s door
z Up: The front windows can be operated
using the buttons.
z Down: The rear windows can be
operated using the buttons.
Safety function
If the window glass encounters resistance
above the middle of the window during
automatic closing, it is immediately
stopped and the window opened again.
If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on
account of frost), keep pressing the switch
for the window in question until the window
has been closed in stages.
137
Picture no: 17870j.tif
Child safety system for rear windows 3
Switch z in the driver’s door
z press (switch z illuminates in red): rear
windows cannot be operated using the
buttons in the rear doors,
z press again (switch z no longer
illuminates in red): rear windows can be
operated using the buttons in the rear
doors.
138
Windows, Sun Roof
Automatic closing 3
see page 69.
Overload
If the windows are repeatedly operated at
short intervals, the power supply is briefly
cut off.
The system is protected by fuses in the fuse
box – see page 246.
Fault
The windows cannot be automatically
opened or closed.
Activate electronic windows as follows:
1. Close doors.
2. Switch on ignition.
3. Window completely open.
4. Close window and press on button for at
least 3 seconds.
5. Repeat for each window.
Picture no: 17046t.tif
Operating windows from outside
The windows can be opened and closed
using the radio remote control.
To open
Press button q until the windows are open.
To close
Press button p until the windows are
closed.
Picture no: 17636j.tif
Windows in rear doors
Turn hand crank 3 towards the front or
rear.
Windows, Sun Roof
Sun roof 3
139
z within 10 minutes of switching ignition
off,
To raise
Turn the rotary switch to any position
between d and e. The sun roof will
automatically move to the desired position.
When the switch is in position e, the sun
roof is fully raised.
z within 10 minutes of opening or closing
the driver’s door,
To lower
Turn rotary switch to d.
z within 10 minutes of inserting or
removing the ignition key.
Position memory
After the ignition has been switched on, the
sun roof can be automatically returned to
its last position by briefly pressing the
rotary switch.
The electric sun roof can be operated
z with ignition on,
Readiness for operation stops when the
vehicle is locked.
Picture no: 17637j.tif
Operated using rotary switch in the
overhead control panel.
To open
Turn the rotary switch to any position
between d and ü. The sun roof will
automatically move to the desired position.
When the switch is in position ü, the sun
roof is fully opened.
Comfort position
Set rotary switch to position f. With the
roof in this position, wind noise is reduced.
To close
Turn rotary switch to d.
140
Windows, Sun Roof
Safety function
If the sun roof encounters resistance during
automatic closing, it is immediately
stopped and opened again, as long as the
vehicle is stationary.
9 Warning
If when the vehicle is being driven the sun
roof encounters resistance during
automatic closing, because of the higher
closing forces involved the protective
function cannot be guaranteed, and
there is a risk of injury.
If the sun roof movement is stiff, e.g. due to
frost, turn rotary switch to d and keep it
pressed until the sun roof is closed.
Automatic closing 3
see page 69.
Sun shade
To reduce the sunlight in the interior with
the sliding roof closed or raised.
Open or close sun shade as required.
When the sun roof is opened, the sun shade
is also opened.
Picture no: 17638j.tif
Closing sun roof from outside
To close the sun roof with the radio remote
control: Press button p until the sun roof is
closed.
If the windows are to be closed from
outside the vehicle, but the sun roof is to be
left open, briefly press the rotary switch
before switching off the ignition.
Windows, Sun Roof
141
Overload
If the system is overloaded, the power
supply is automatically cut off for a short
time.
Fault
If the sun roof no longer assumes the
desired position automatically, program
sun roof electronics as follows:
1. Switch on ignition.
2. Press the rotary switch until the sun roof
is shut, then keep it pressed for at least a
further 3 seconds.
3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it
depressed until the sun roof is open.
4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it
depressed until the sun roof is closed.
5. Turn rotary switch to e and leave there
until the sun roof is fully raised.
6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it
depressed until the sun roof is closed.
Picture no: 17639j.tif
Picture no: 17640j.tif
Electrically operated
rear window blind 3
Roller blinds at rear door
windows 3
Reduces intensity of sunlight shining on to
rear seats. Operation with ignition
switched on.
To reduce sunlight at the rear seats.
To raise
To lower
=
=
Press N
Press N again
Do not operate blind if there are objects
lying in front of the rear window.
Pull the blind upwards using the grip and
engage it at the top in the door frame.
142
Climate control
Climate control
Air vents ...............................................
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors .....................
Heated front seats 3...........................
Heated rear seats 3 ............................
Driver’s seat with climate control 3 ...
Cooled glove compartment 3 ............
Heating and ventilation system .........
Air conditioning system 3...................
Automatic air conditioning system 3
Electronic climate control system 3 ...
Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 ..........
Air intake ..............................................
Air outlet...............................................
Pollen filter ...........................................
General information ............................
Maintenance ........................................
144
145
145
145
146
146
147
150
152
158
165
168
168
168
168
169
Picture no: 17641j.tif
Heating and ventilation system,
air conditioning system 3
Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are
combined into one unit that is designed to
provide comfort regardless of the season,
weather or outside temperature.
When cooling 3 is activated, the air is
cooled and dried.
The heating unit heats the air as required in
all operating modes depending on the
position of the temperature switch. The air
supply can be adjusted to suit
requirements by means of the fan.
Picture no: 17642j.tif
Vehicles without an air conditioning system
do not have buttons for cooling n,
recirculation 4 or demisting and
defrosting V.
Air conditioning system 3 – see page 150.
Climate control
143
The set values appear on the information
display.
Electronic climate control system – see
page 158.
Picture no: 17643j.tif
Picture no: 17675j.tif
Automatic air conditioning
system 3
Electronic climate control
system 3
Provides a comfortable interior regardless
of the weather, outside temperature or
season.
Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle
interior regardless of the conditions
outside.
When an interior temperature is set with
the temperature control, the temperature
and amount of inflowing air are
automatically regulated. A uniform,
comfortable climate in the vehicle is
thereby automatically obtained based on
outside climate conditions.
To ensure a uniform and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
inflowing air, air-flow rate and air
distribution are automatically adapted
based on the climate conditions outside
the vehicle and the current temperature of
the vehicle interior.
Automatic air conditioning system – see
page 152.
144
Climate control
Picture no: 17645j.tif
Air vents
Pleasant ventilation to the head area
controlled by the position of the
temperature switch.
To increase the air supply, set the fan to a
higher speed and set the air distribution
switch to M.
Centre and side air vents (1)
To open vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel
up.
Adjust the direction of air flow by turning
the horizontal and vertical adjuster wheels.
Picture no: 17646j.tif
To close the vents turn the adjustment
wheel fully downwards.
Windscreen defroster nozzles (2)
Air distribution switch to l or J:
Air flows onto windscreen and side
windows.
Additional vents
can be found beneath the windscreen and
the side windows, and also in the footwell.
Picture no: 17647j.tif
Rear air vents 3
To open vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel
all the way up.
Adjust quantity of air by rotating the
control wheel.
The air flow can be directed as desired by
tilting and swivelling the slats.
To close the vents turn the adjustment
wheel fully downwards.
If the rear seats are unoccupied close the
rear nozzles to increase the air supply at
the front.
Climate control
Picture no: 17651j.tif
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors
Picture no: 17648j.tif
145
Picture no: 17649j.tif
Heated front seats 3
Heated rear seats 3
Operation with ignition switched on:
Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air
vent for the left and right-hand seats.
Two switches at rear of centre console in
front of the rear seats.
Press Ü
Press Ü again
Turn relevant wheel to set required heating
level.
Operation with ignition switched on:
On
Off
=
=
Control indicator in the button.
Control indicator above adjustment wheel.
Heating takes place with the engine
running and is switched off automatically
after approximately 15 minutes.
We do not recommend prolonged use of
the highest level for people with sensitive
skin.
The heated rear window automatically
switches on when the diesel particle filter is
being cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
To switch off, set wheel to 0.
Heating only with ignition switched on.
On
Off
=
=
Press ß
Press ß again
Control indicators in switches.
The outboard seats are heated.
146
Climate control
General information,
as well as information on air
intake, air outlet, pollen filter and
maintenance,
see pages 168, 169.
Picture no: 17650j.tif
Driver’s seat with climate
control 3
Knurled wheel at driver’s side below centre
air vents.
Move knurled wheel to required ventilation
or heating setting as per requirements.
Control indicator above adjustment wheel.
We do not recommend prolonged use of
the highest heating level for people with
sensitive skin.
To switch off, set wheel to 0.
Function only available with ignition
switched on.
Picture no: 17652j.tif
Cooled glove compartment 3
Cooled air is fed into the glove
compartment through a nozzle.
If glove compartment cooling is not
needed, turn the wheel downwards.
Climate control
Picture no: 17653j.tif
Heating and ventilation system
Left-hand rotary switch: Air distribution
L
to head area above adjustable air
vents and to foot well
M
to headroom via adjustable air
vents
l
to the windscreen and
front door windows
J
to the windscreen, front door
windows,
to foot well
K
to foot well
Open the air vents when the switch is
set to L or M.
Picture no: 17654j.tif
Centre rotary switch: Temperature
red zone
=
warm
blue zone
=
cold
147
Picture no: 17655j.tif
Right-hand rotary switch: air flow
Four fan speeds:
x
Fan off
4
Highest speed
The rate of air flow is determined by the
fan. The fan should therefore also be
switched on during a journey.
148
Climate control
Heating
The amount of heat is dependent on the
coolant temperature and is thus not fully
attained until the engine is warm.
The comfort and general well-being of the
vehicle occupants are to a large extent
dependent on a suitable ventilation and
heating setting.
For rapid warming of the passenger
compartment:
z Set the air distribution switch to the
desired position – see page 147.
To obtain temperature stratification in the
vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and
warm feet" effect, move the rotary air
distribution switch to K or J, move the
rotary temperature switch to the central
position and open the centre air vents.
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as
far as it will go (warm).
z Set the fan to speed 3.
Picture no: 17656j.tif
Ventilation
z For maximum ventilation in head area:
set air distribution switch to M and open
all vents.
z For ventilation to foot well: Set air
distribution switch to K.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the foot well: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set the temperature to the desired
setting.
z Set the fan to the desired setting.
The passenger compartment is heated
more rapidly by an electric auxiliary heater
in vehicles with Quickheat 3.
Climate control
149
z Open side air vents as required and
direct them towards door windows.
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
For simultaneous warming of the foot well,
set air distribution switch to J.
Picture no: 17657j.tif
Heating the foot well
z Set air distribution switch to K.
z Set the temperature switch in the red
zone.
z Switch on fan.
Picture no: 17658j.tif
Demisting and defrosting windows
9 Warning
Disregard of the instructions could lead
to misting or icing of the windows and
subsequent accidents due to impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, such as in damp
weather, from wet clothes or when outside
temperatures are low:
z Move air distribution switch to l.
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as
far as it will go (warm).
z Set the fan switch to 3 or 4.
150
Climate control
Air conditioning system 3
As a supplement to the heating and
ventilation system, the air conditioning
system cools and dehumidifies (dries)
inflowing air.
If cooling or dehumidification is not
desired, switch off cooling in order to save
fuel.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
Picture no: 17659j.tif
Picture no: 17660j.tif
Cooling n
Operation only with engine running:
On
=
Press n
Off
=
Press n again
Air recirculation system 4
The recirculation switch 4 is used to set
the ventilation system in recirculation
mode (control indicator in switch).
Control indicator in the button.
If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate
from outside: temporarily switch on air
recirculation system 4.
Climate control
151
The switched-on air recirculation system
reduces air replacement. The humidity
increases and the windows may mist up.
The quality of the interior air deteriorates
over time, which may cause drowsiness.
Picture no: 17661j.tif
Comfort setting
z Set cooling n as desired.
z Air recirculation system 4 off.
z Set air distribution switch to M or L.
z Set temperature switch as desired.
z Set fan switch to desired setting.
z Open vents as required.
Temperature switch in centre of
adjustment range: warmer air will flow into
the foot well and cooler air into the upper
zone, with warmer air coming from the side
air vents and cooler air from the centre
vents.
Picture no: 17662j.tif
Maximum cooling
Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escape rapidly.
z Cooling n on.
z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Turn the temperature switch
anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold).
z Set fan switch to 4.
z Open all vents.
The system will switch automatically to
recirculation mode.
152
Climate control
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise.
z Open side air vents as required and
direct them towards door windows.
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
Operation with cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is not possible when outside
temperatures are low.
To switch off, press button V again; the
air conditioning will operate at the settings
selected previously.
Picture no: 17663j.tif
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Disregard of the instructions could lead
to misting or icing of the windows and
subsequent accidents due to impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, such as in damp
weather, from wet clothes or when outside
temperatures are low:
z Cooling n on.
z Press button V: The fan will
automatically switch to 4, air distribution
directed on to the windscreen.
Automatic air conditioning
system 3
Provides a uniformly comfortable interior
regardless of the weather, outside
temperature or season.
To ensure a constant and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are
changed automatically based on climate
conditions outside the vehicle.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
automatically compensated.
Climate control
Picture no: 17912j.tif
Automatic mode
Basic setting for maximum comfort:
z Set fan switch to A.
Picture no: 17666j.tif
Air distribtion setting
L
to head area above adjustable air
vents and to foot well
153
Picture no: 17667j.tif
Temperature preset
Set the rotary switch to a value betwen
17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings are
possible.
M
to headroom via adjustable air
vents
l
to the windscreen and
front door windows
For reasons of comfort, temperature can
only be changed in small increments.
J
to the windscreen, front door
windows
to foot well
z All front air vents open. If desired, the
rear vents also 3.
K
to foot well
There is no temperature control for settings
below 17 °C (all the way left) or
above 27 °C (all the way right). The air
conditioning system works at maximum
cooling or heating.
Deactivation of the air conditioning
compressor can reduce the level of comfort
and safety – see page 154.
Open the air vents when the switch is
set to L or M.
z Set air distribution switch to desired
position – see next column.
z Use rotary switch to set temperature
to 22 °C (a higher or lower temperature
can be set as desired).
z Air conditioning compressor activation –
see page 154.
Intermediate settings are possible.
The selected temperature is maintained.
154
Climate control
When the cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is active, the air is cooled and
dehumidified. If cooling or dehumidification
is not desired, switch off cooling in order to
save fuel.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
Picture no: 17668j.tif
Air flow setting
1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting.
Intermediate settings are possible.
A
Automatic control of fan speed
x
Fan off
The fan speed regulates the rate of air flow
that is needed to maintain the pre-selected
temperature.
Select automatic mode for the highest level
of comfort.
When the fan is off, the air conditioning
compressor is also off.
Picture no: 17669j.tif
To activate/deactivate air conditioning
compressor (cooling) n
Operation only with engine running:
On
=
Press n
Off
=
Press n again
Control indicator in pushbutton.
Climate control
155
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
recirculation mode. The quality of the
passenger compartment air deteriorates
which may cause the vehicle occupants to
feel drowsy. In operation without cooling
the air humidity increases, so the windows
may mist up. Consequently, manual air
recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:
Press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button goes off.
Picture no: 17670j.tif
Picture no: 17671j.tif
Manual air recirculation mode
The air recirculation system prevents the
entry of outside air and the air in the
passenger compartment is circulated.
Ventilation
z For maximum ventilation in head area:
set air distribution switch to M and open
all vents,
Press button 4, control indicator in
button.
z for ventilation to foot well: Set air
distribution switch to K,
z for simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the foot well: set air distribution
switch to L,
z set desired temperature,
z set fan switch to A. The fan can also be
manually set: Set the rotary switch to
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.
156
Climate control
Heating
The amount of heat is dependent on the
coolant temperature and is thus not fully
attained until the engine is warm.
For rapid warming of the passenger
compartment:
z Set the air distribution switch to the
desired position – see page 147.
z Set the centre rotary switch to the
desired temperature. We recommend a
value of about 22 °C.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be
manually set: Set the rotary switch to
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.
The passenger compartment is heated
more rapidly by an electric auxiliary heater
in vehicles with Quickheat 3.
The comfort and general well-being of the
vehicle occupants are to a large extent
dependent on a suitable ventilation and
heating setting.
To obtain temperature stratification in the
vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and
warm feet" effect, move the rotary air
distribution switch to K or J, move the
rotary temperature switch to approx. 22 °
and open the centre air vents.
Picture no: 17672j.tif
Maximum cooling
for very hot interior
Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escape rapidly.
z Cooling n on.
z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Set the temperature switch to the desired
temperature.
z Set fan switch to A.
z Open all vents.
Climate control
157
The automatic climate control system
provides maximum cooling down to the set
value.
z Set temperature to maximum heating,
i.e. turn the centre rotary switch all the
way to the right (28 °C).
At settings below 17 °C (rotary switch all
the way to the left), the system continually
runs with maximum cooling. When the air
conditioning compressor is running, the
system is automatically set to air
recirculation.
Operation with cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is not possible when outside
temperatures are low.
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
To switch off, press button V again; the
automatic air conditioning system will
operate at the settings selected previously.
Picture no: 17673j.tif
Demisting and defrosting the windows
9 Warning
Disregard of the instructions could lead
to misting or icing of the windows and
subsequent accidents due to impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, such as in damp
weather, from wet clothes or when outside
temperatures are low:
z Cooling n on.
z Press button V: In switch position A, the
fan automatically switches to the highest
speed and air is directed to the
windscreen.
158
Climate control
Electronic climate control
system 3
Provides a the greatest amount of comfort
in the interior regardless of the weather,
outside temperature or season.
To ensure a constant and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the
air distribution are changed automatically
according to climatic conditions outside
the vehicle.
The air is automatically regulated in
accordance with the settings personally
selected for the driver and passenger sides.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
automatically compensated.
Data is shown on the information display.
Setting modifications are briefly shown in
the information display, superimposing
over the currently displayed menu.
The display can vary according to the type
of presentation – see page 42.
The settings of the climate control system
are automatically stored specifically for the
vehicle key used. See page 64.
Picture no: 17675j.tif
Different settings are stored for each
remote control. Use of a remote control will
activate the settings associated with it.
Manual settings e. g. operating without
cooling and air distribution can be selected
using the menu – see page 160.
When cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is active, air is cooled and
dehumidified.
The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen
and spores from the inflowing outside air.
Picture no: 17676j.tif
The automatic air recirculation system 3
has an air quality sensor 3 to detect
harmful ambient gases, in which case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
When set to automatic mode, the climate
control system provides the optimal
settings for almost all conditions. If
necessary, climate control system settings
can be modified manually.
The climate control system is only
operational when the engine is running.
Cooling (air conditioning compressor)
switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures.
Climate control
The temperature can be set higher or lower
as desired.
Different temperatures can be set for the
driver and passenger sides.
Switching off the air conditioning
compressor (Eco appears in the display)
can have a detrimental effect on comfort
and safety, see page 162.
All air vents (except the rear air vents 3)
are controlled automatically in automatic
mode. The front air vents should therefore
always be open.
Picture no: 17528j.tif
Automatic mode
Basic setting for maximum comfort:
z Press AUTO button.
z All front air vents open. If desired, the
rear vents also 3.
z Air conditioning compressor activation –
see page 162.
z Individually set temperature for the
driver’s and passenger side to 22 °C
using the outer knobs.
159
Automatic air recirculation system 3
The ventilation system is set to recirculation
mode and interior air is recirculated.
The automatic air recirculation system has
an air quality sensor to detect harmful
gases in the outside air, in which case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
At low outside temperatures and with the
cooling (air conditioning compressor)
switched off, automatic recirculation
operation will be disabled. This prevents
the windows from misting up. Switch
manually to air recirculation as necessary.
Activating/deactivating automatic air
recirculation system – see page 163.
Manual recirculation mode – see page 164.
160
Climate control
Temperature preset
Using the outer knobs, temperatures can
be individually set to values between 16 °C
and 28 °C.
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
Autom. blower
Auto. recirc
For reasons of comfort, temperature can
only be changed in small increments.
The passenger compartment is heated
more rapidly by an electric auxiliary heater
in vehicles with Quickheat 3.
If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo
appears in the display: the climate control
system runs constantly at maximum
cooling power. The temperature is not
regulated.
If a temperature above 28 °C is set, Hi
appears in the display: the climate control
system runs constantly at maximum
heating power. The temperature is not
regulated.
Temperature settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
Picture no: 17677j.tif
Picture no: 17678j.tif
Common temperature setting
Press the knob for the driver’s side. The
temperature for both the driver and
passenger side together can be set using
the knob on the driver’s side.
Manual settings
Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or
misted windows), the functions of the
climate control system can be modified
manually.
Individual temperature settings
Press the knob for the passenger side.
Temperatures can be set independently of
each other using the knobs for the driver
and passenger sides.
Climate control system settings can be
changed via the centre knob, the buttons
and the menus depicted on the display.
The temperature on both the driver and
passenger side are shown in the display.
For reasons of comfort, the temperatures
cannot differ by more than 2 °C.
Press the centre knob to call up the menu.
The menu for manual climate control
system settings appears in the display.
Climate control
The air flow can be increased or decreased
by turning the central knob.
Air distribut.
To return to automatic mode: press
button V or AUTO.
Heated rear window, see page 145.
Auxiliary heating 3, see page 165.
Picture no: 17679j.tif
The individual menu items are marked by
rotating the centre knob and selected by
pressing it. Selecting certain menus by
pressing the knob will open a submenu.
To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or
right to Return or Main and select.
Manual settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
161
Picture no: 17680j.tif
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, such as in damp
weather, from wet clothes or when outside
temperatures are low:
Press button V, control indicator in
button.
Temperature and air distribution settings
are made automatically, the fan runs at a
high speed (fan speed is indicated on the
display) and the windows are quickly
cleared of moisture and ice.
162
Climate control
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
Autom. blower
… Auto. recirc
Air conditioning
on / off
Inflowing air is neither cooled nor
dehumidified. This restricts the level of
comfort provided by the electronic climate
control system. This may cause the
windows to mist up, for example.
Air distribut.
To activate cooling: Select menu item AC
from the manual settings menu and press
to activate cooling.
Picture no: 17681j.tif
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning compressor
If no cooling or dehumidification is
required, switch the air conditioning
compressor off (maximum energy savings):
Mark menu item AC from the manual
settings menu and select by pressing. Eco
appears on the display.
Picture no: 17682j.tif
Air distribution
Select menu item Air distribut. from the
manual settings menu.
Make the desired settings in the Air
distribut. menu:
Up
Air distribution to windscreen
and front side windows
Centre
Air to vehicle occupants
via front adjustable air vents
Down
Air distribution to foot well
Return to automatic air distribution:
deactivate relevant setting or press button
AUTO.
Climate control
Automatic blower
Strong
Normal
Weak
Picture no: 17683j.tif
Picture no: 17684j.tif
Air flow
Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or
anticlockwise (if no menu for manual
settings is displayed). The selected fan
level is indicated by x and numbers in the
display.
Fan control in automatic mode 3
Fan regulation in automatic mode can be
modified.
At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air
conditioning compressor) are switched off.
Depending on the setting, the maximum
air flow, and thereby the noise level, will
increase.
To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO
button.
Select menu item Automatic blower from
the manual settings menu and select the
desired fan control.
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
Autom. blower
Auto. recirc
163
Automatic
recirculation
air control at
bad outside air
Picture no: 17685j.tif
Switching automatic recirculation 3 on or
off
The automatic air recirculation system has
an air quality sensor to detect harmful
gases in the outside air, in which case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
Select menu item Auto. recirc from the
manual settings menu and switch it on or
off by pressing.
Switch to manual air recirculation as
necessary.
164
Climate control
The air conditioning will operate for a
limited period of time.
Residual air conditioning on
If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also
automatically switches on. Observe notes
on page 165.
To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO
button.
Picture no: 17686j.tif
Manual air recirculation mode
The air recirculation system prevents the
entry of outside air and the air in the
passenger compartment is circulated.
Press button 4, control indicator in
button.
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
recirculation mode. The quality of the
passenger compartment air deteriorates
which may cause the vehicle occupants to
feel drowsy. In operation without cooling
the air humidity increases, so the windows
may mist up. Consequently, manual air
recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:
Press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button goes off.
Picture no: 17687j.tif
Air conditioning with the engine not
running
When the vehicle is stopped and the
ignition off, the heat or cooling power still
in the system can be used to condition the
passenger compartment, for example
when stopped at a level crossing.
Press button AUTO with the ignition off.
Residual air conditioning on will appear
briefly in the display.
Climate control
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
Autom. blower
Auto. recirc
Parking heater
Picture no: 17688j.tif
Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3
If the engine is switched off, the interior is
heated or ventilated depending on the
values that have been set and the interior
temperature.
The regulation is in accordance with the
most recent temperature settings in the
climate control system – see page 160.
When the system is switched on, the
temperature setting can be varied using
the outer rotary knobs.
The air is directed to the windscreen and
the front side windows if the V button is
pressed before switching the ignition off.
9 Warning
Do not switch auxiliary heater on in filling
stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or
injury.
165
Parking heater
Start 1
Start 2
Start 3
On
Setting
Picture no: 17689j.tif
Direct activation
For immediate activation with the ignition
on, select menu item Parking heater and
then menu item On from the manual
settings menu.
When the system is activated, the control
indicator in the button AUTO will
illuminate.
The system switches itself off automatically
after a maximum of 60 minutes depending
on the values that have been set and the
interior temperature.
For early deactivation, press the AUTO
button or select menu item Parking heater
and then menu item On once again.
166
Climate control
Parking heater
Setting
Start 1
Start 1
Start 1
Start 2
Start 2
Start 2
Start 3
Start 3
Start 3
On
On
Setting
Setting
Parking heater
Picture no: 17690j.tif
Switching on at a programmed time
Three programmed times can be stored for
switching on.
For safety reasons only one programmed
time for switching on can be active at any
one time. After the heating cycle has been
completed, the next required time for
switching on must be activated afresh.
To store a programmed time for activation,
select menu item Parking heater from the
manual settings menu.
After menu item Parking heater the
current status will be shown.
Picture no: 17691j.tif
To set a time, select menu item Setting.
Then select menu item Start 1, Start 2 or
Start 3 and set the desired time.
Picture no: 17692j.tif
Select the required time for programmed
switching on.
When the system is activated, the control
indicator in the button AUTO will
illuminate.
The system switches itself off automatically
after a maximum of 60 minutes depending
on the values that have been set and the
interior temperature.
To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO
button.
The menu for auxiliary heating can be
called up within 2 hours of switching the
ignition off, by pressing on the central
rotary knob, and settings entered.
Climate control
167
The remote control has a range of
approx. 600 m. The range can be reduced
by obstructions between the sender and
receiver (e.g. walls) and by low power in the
battery.
The system switches itself off automatically
after a maximum of 60 minutes depending
on the values that have been set and the
interior temperature.
The auxiliary heating can be switched off
at any time by pressing the button §.
Deactivating an activated switch-on time:
Picture no: 17693j.tif
Remote control
The system can also be switched on and off
directly using the remote control:
On
=
Press button b, the control
indicator in the remote control
unit will illuminate
Off
=
Press button §, the control
indicator in the remote control
unit will illuminate
Whilst the control indicator is illuminated,
no further signal can be sent.
When the system is activated, the control
indicator in the button AUTO will
illuminate.
1. Press button §.
2. Delay of at least 3 seconds.
3. Press button § again.
If required, up to three additional remote
control units can be programmed. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17694j.tif
Changing the remote control battery
Replace the battery immediately if the
range of the remote control starts to
become reduced.
Insert a pointed object into the opening in
the underside of the remote control and flip
open the cover. Replace batteries
observing installation position. For battery
type – see page 307.
Always exchange all batteries at the same
time.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in accordance with environmental
protection regulations.
168
Climate control
Air outlet
General information
Do not cover the air outlets when storing
items in the luggage compartment storage
compartments.
If the windscreen is misted due to damp
weather, temporarily adjust the system as
described under "Demisting and defrosting
the windows", see pages 149, 152 and 161.
Pollen filter
The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen
and spores from the air entering from
outside. The active carbon layer 3
eliminates most odours and harmful
ambient gases from the air.
Picture no: 17695j.tif
Air intake
The air intakes in front of the windscreen on
the far right and left sides of the engine
compartment must be kept clear to allow
air intake. Remove any leaves, dirt or snow.
Have the pollen filter replaced at the
intervals specified in the Service Booklet.
The cooling system 3 operates most
effectively with the windows and sun roof 3
closed. If the passenger compartment has
heated up considerably after a long period
in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows
and sun roof 3 so that the hot air can
escape quickly.
Climate control
When cooling 3 (air conditioning
compressor) is switched on condensation
forms, which is expelled from the underside
of the vehicle.
At least one air vent must be open while
cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is
on in order to prevent the evaporator from
icing up due to lack of air movement.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
When the auxiliary heating/auxiliary
ventilation 3 is switched on the Vauxhall
alarm system monitoring of the vehicle
interior 3 is deactivated.
Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (approx.
0.3 litres per heating process on average).
When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched
on there may briefly be some smoke and
noise.
The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself
on at outside temperatures of less than
approx. 20 °C and at coolant temperatures
of less than approx. 80 °C.
In order to improve heating power and
ensure that the engine operating
temperature is reached quickly, auxiliary
heating 3 also switches on automatically
when driving if the outside temperature is
less than approx. 8 °C. This occurs
irrespective of stored auxiliary heating
switch-on times. Auxiliary heating switches
itself off automatically when the engine is
switched off, while the combustion air fan
continues running for approx. 2 minutes
(humming noise).
169
Maintenance
In order to ensure consistently good
operation, the air conditioning
compressor 3 must be switched on for
several minutes once per month
irrespective of the weather or time of year.
If the vehicle has an electronic climate
control system, this is done automatically
during travel. Operation with cooling (air
conditioning compressor) is not possible
when outside temperatures are low. Every
6 months, the auxiliary heating 3 should
be operated for a few minutes at a preset
temperature above 22 °C.
If a fault occurs, consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
170
Easytronic
Easytronic
Easytronic 3
The semi-automatic Easytronic
transmission 3 permits manual (manual
mode) or automatic gear shifting
(automatic mode), both with automatic
clutch control.
9 Warning
Transmission display ...........................
Starting the engine..............................
Easytronic operation via the
selector lever .....................................
Move selector lever toward N.............
Starting off ...........................................
Electronically controlled driving
programmes ......................................
Winter programme T .........................
Kickdown ..............................................
Braking assistance from engine .........
Stopping the vehicle............................
Vehicle storage ....................................
"Rocking" the car .................................
Manoeuvring the vehicle.....................
Fault......................................................
Interruption of power supply ..............
170
171
171
171
172
173
174
174
175
175
175
176
176
176
177
Disregard of these instructions may lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Picture no: 17924j.tif
Transmission display
Shows the mode or current gear.
Easytronic
171
It is not necessary to select the neutral
position before starting. If no gear is
engaged, the transmission automatically
shifts into neutral position (N) before
starting the engine. This can lead to a
slight delay when starting.
Picture no: 18277j.tif
Starting the engine
Operate foot brake when starting the
engine. The engine can only be started
with the foot brake operated. "N" appears
in the transmission display. If the foot
brake is not operated the control
indicator j illuminates on the instrument
panel, and "N" flashes in the transmission
display - the engine cannot be started.
Also the vehicle cannot be started if all
brake lights have failed.
Picture no: 17909j.tif
Easytronic operation via the
selector lever
Always move the selector lever in the
appropriate direction as far as it will go.
Upon release, it automatically returns to
the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/
mode indicator in the transmission display.
Move selector lever toward N
Neutral.
172
Easytronic
It is also possible to start off without
depressing the foot brake if the accelerator
pedal is operated directly after moving the
selector lever. If there is no immediate
acceleration or the foot brake is not
depressed, no gear is engaged and "A"
flashes. After a few seconds, the display
reverts to "N". Repeat previously described
starting procedure.
In Automatic mode, selection of other
gears is automatic irrespective of driving
conditions.
Picture no: 17910j.tif
Starting off
Depress the foot brake, release the hand
brake, move the selector lever to A, + or -.
Easytronic is in automatic mode and first
gear is engaged (second gear if the Winter
programme is active). "A" appears in the
transmission display.
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot
brake is released.
Move selector lever toward A
Switch between automatic and manual
mode.
Manual gear shifting is possible in manual
mode. The currently engaged gear
appears in the display.
If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic
will automatically shift to a lower gear even
in Manual mode. This prevents the engine
from stalling.
Picture no: 17909j.tif
Move selector lever toward + or + Shift to a higher gear.
-
Shift to a lower gear.
If a higher gear is selected when the
running speed is too low, or a lower gear
when the speed is too high, no shift is
effected. This prevents the engine from
running at too low or too high revs.
Gears can be skipped by moving the
selector lever repeatedly at short intervals.
Easytronic
If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on
movement of the selector lever to + or Easytronic shifts to manual mode and
changes up or down. The transmission
display shows the currently selected gear.
Move selector lever toward R
Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is
stationary.
Depress the foot brake, release the hand
brake and move the selector lever to R.
Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in
the transmission display.
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot
brake is released.
It is also possible to start off in reverse
without depressing the foot brake if the
accelerator pedal is operated directly after
moving the selector lever. If there is no
immediate acceleration or the foot brake is
not depressed, no gear is engaged and "R"
flashes. After a few seconds, the display
reverts to "N". Repeat previously described
starting procedure.
173
Electronically controlled driving
programmes
z By means of delayed gear changing
(higher engine speeds) following a cold
start, the operating temperature
programme in automatic mode quickly
and automatically brings the catalytic
converter to the temperature required
for optimum pollutant reduction.
z Adaptive programmes automatically
adapt gear shifting in automatic mode
to suit the driving conditions, such as if
the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer,
has a high payload, or is being driven on
inclines.
z Winter programme: Press button T - see
next page.
174
Easytronic
If the vehicle is switched to manual mode
while the winter programme is active, the
winter programme is interrupted. The
winter programme resumes upon return to
automatic mode.
Picture no: 17911j.tif
Picture no: 17176t.tif
Winter programme T
Kickdown
In the event of difficulties starting off on
slippery roads, press button T ("A" and T
appear in the transmission display).
Easytronic switches to automatic mode
and the vehicle sets off in second gear.
Accelerator pedal pressed past the
pressure point: below certain speeds, the
transmission shifts down into a lower gear.
Full engine power is available for
acceleration.
The winter program is switched off by:
z pressing button T again,
z turning off the ignition.
During kickdown no manual gear shifting is
possible.
In order to protect the Easytronic the winter
programme automatically switches itself
off at extremely high clutch temperatures.
Easytronic
When the engine speed approaches its
upper limit, the transmission shifts to a
higher gear during kickdown even in
Manual mode.
Without kickdown this automatic shift is
not effected in Manual mode.
Braking assistance from engine
Automatic mode:
When driving downhill, Easytronic does not
shift into higher gears until a fairly high
engine speed has been reached. When
braking, Easytronic shifts down in good
time.
Manual mode:
To utilise the engine braking effect, select a
lower gear in good time when driving
downhill.
Stopping the vehicle
Vehicle storage
In Automatic or Manual mode, when the
vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter
mode engaged, second gear) is engaged
automatically and the clutch released. In R
reverse remains engaged.
Before leaving the vehicle:
z engage hand brake,
z remove ignition key.
When the engine is running, a gear is
engaged and the foot brake is not
depressed, a warning buzzer sounds when
the driver’s door is opened and the gear
shown in the transmission display flashes
at a rapid rate. If the hand brake is not
engaged, the vehicle creeps. Move the
selector lever to N and apply the hand
brake.
When stopping on gradients, engage the
hand brake or depress the brake pedal. To
prevent overheating of the clutch, do not
increase engine speed to ensure smooth
idling when in gear.
In order to prevent damage to the
Easytronic the clutch is automatically
engaged at extremely high clutch
temperatures.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
175
The most recently engaged gear (indicator
in transmission display) remains engaged.
With N, no gear is engaged.
When the ignition is switched off the
Easytronic no longer responds to
movement of the selector lever.
Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery
may become discharged if the vehicle is
parked for long periods.
If the hand brake has not been applied, the
control indicator R flashes for a few
seconds after the ignition is switched off.
With the engine off and the hand brake not
applied, when the driver’s door is opened a
warning buzzer sounds and the control
indicator R flashes; switch on ignition,
engage gear, switch off ignition and apply
hand brake.
176
Easytronic
"Rocking" the car
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
move the selector lever between R and A
(or + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying
light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do
not race the engine and avoid sudden
acceleration.
This applies only to the exceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
Picture no: 17177t.tif
Picture no: 17544j.tif
Manoeuvring the vehicle
Fault
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth
during attempts to park or in garage
entrances the creeping movement can be
utilised by releasing the foot brake.
Control indicator A illuminates in the
event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In
the event of serious faults, F also appears
in the transmission display.
Never actuate accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
It is possible to continue driving if only
control indicator A illuminates. Manual
mode can then no longer be selected.
To prevent damage, Easytronic
disengages the "creep function" at
extremely high automatic clutch
temperatures.
If F appears in the transmission display,
continued driving is not possible.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
Easytronic
If the cause of the interruption to the power
supply is not the discharged battery,
consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the vehicle
has to be removed from moving traffic,
release clutch as follows:
6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be
in full contact with the housing.
1. Apply hand brake and switch off
ignition.
Consult a workshop immediately. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
2. Open bonnet.
Picture no: 17925j.tif
Interruption of power supply
The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle
battery is discharged and a gear has been
selected. The vehicle cannot move.
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using
jump leads – see page 230.
177
3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see
figure 17925 J) so that no dirt can get
into the opening when the cap is
removed.
4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by
lifting upwards – see figure 17925 J.
5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 –
see page 238) until clear resistance can
be felt. The clutch has now been
disengaged.
Do not turn beyond the resistance, since
this can damage the Easytronic.
Towing the vehicle and starting the engine
is not permitted when the clutch has been
released in this way, although the vehicle
can be moved a short distance.
178
Automatic transmission
Automatic
transmission
Transmission display ...........................
Selector lever settings P, R, N and D
(automatic mode) .............................
ActiveSelect (manual mode) ..............
Transmission display ...........................
Electronically controlled driving
programmes ......................................
Winter programme T .........................
Kickdown ..............................................
Engine braking.....................................
"Rocking" the car .................................
Manoeuvring the vehicle.....................
Stopping the vehicle............................
Fault......................................................
Interruption of power supply ..............
Automatic transmission 3
The automatic transmission allows
automatic shifting (Automatic mode) or
manual shifting (Manual mode) to take
place.
179
179
180
179
181
182
182
183
183
183
184
184
185
The engine can only be started with the
selector lever in P or N. When starting in N,
depress the foot brake or apply the hand
brake. After the engine has started,
depress the brake before engaging a gear.
Do not accelerate while selecting a gear.
Once a gear is engaged and the brake is
released, the vehicle "creeps".
Never depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal simultaneously. The
selected gear is shown in the transmission
display, see page 179.
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions may lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Selecting D puts the transmission in
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is moved to the left from
the D position, manual mode is activated.
Gearchanges can then be made manually
by tipping the selector lever toward + or -.
Automatic transmission
179
The selector lever can only be moved out of
position P or N with the ignition switched on
and the foot brake applied (selector lever
lock). In selector lever position N the
selector lever lock is activated after a delay
and only if the vehicle is stationary.
Picture no: 17536j.tif
Transmission display
Display of selector lever setting, gear and
mode.
P
Park position.
R
Reverse gear.
N
Neutral or idling position.
D
Automatic mode.
1-6 Manual mode, engaged gear.
Picture no: 17696j.tif
Selector lever settings P, R, N
and D (automatic mode)
P
Park position, front wheels blocked.
Only select with vehicle stationary
and hand brake applied. "P" appears
in the transmission display.
R
Reverse gear. Only select when
vehicle is stationary. "R" appears in
the transmission display.
N
Neutral or idling position. "N"
appears in the transmission display.
D
Drive position for normal driving in 1st
to highest gear. "D" appears in the
transmission display.
180
Automatic transmission
If the engine speed is too slow, the
transmission automatically shifts to a lower
gear, but not if the gear was selected
below a certain speed.
If a higher gear is selected below a certain
speed a downshift does not take place.
When engine speed is high, there is no
automatic shift to a higher gear.
For reasons of safety, Kickdown also
functions in manual mode – see page 182.
Picture no: 17697j.tif
In position P or N, control indicator j
illuminates red in the selector lever
indicator strip, and the selector lever is
blocked.
Picture no: 17698j.tif
ActiveSelect (manual mode)
Shift the selector lever from D first to the left
and then forward or rearward.
To engage P or R, push button on selector
lever.
+
-
The engine can only be started with lever in
position P or N. When position N is selected,
press foot brake or engage hand brake
before starting.
If a higher gear is selected at too low a
speed or a lower gear selected at too high
a speed, there is no change. This avoids
revs that are too low or too high.
Do not accelerate during the selection
procedure.
If the transmission fluid temperature is less
than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot be
moved until the fluid temperature reaches
-25 °C with the engine running (P or N
flashes in the transmission display for as
long as the selector lever is locked).
Shift to a higher gear
Shift to a lower gear
The selected gear is shown in the
transmission display – see page 179.
Automatic transmission
Electronically controlled driving
programmes
z With adaptive programmes, shifting into
other gears is handled automatically
based on the driving style, e.g.:
– Economical driving style: at slower
engine speeds.
– Adaptation to special driving
conditions still takes place, such as:
driving up and down hills, towing a
caravan or trailer, and with a heavy
load.
181
z Automatic neutral shift function
automatically sets the transmission to N
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at
traffic lights.
The automatic neutral shift function is
activated when the following occurs
simultaneously:
– The selector lever is in Automatic or
Manual mode.
– The foot brake is depressed.
– The vehicle is stationary.
– The accelerator pedal is not
actuated.
– The transmission oil temperature is
above 0 °C.
As soon as the brake is released and the
accelerator pedal is depressed, the
vehicle starts off in the usual manner.
z After a cold start, the operating
temperature programme ensures that
the correct gear (increased engine
speed) is selected to quickly bring the
catalytic converter to the temperature
required for optimum pollutant
reduction.
Picture no: 17705j.tif
z When SPORT mode of Continuous
Damping Control 3 is activated, shift
times are reduced and gearchanges
occur at a higher engine speed (unless
cruise control is active). Control
indicator 1 appears in the transmission
display. Continuous Damping Control,
SPORT mode 3 – see page 200.
z Winter programme: Press button T.
Control indicator T appears in the
transmission display - see next page.
182
Automatic transmission
To deactivate
The winter program is switched off by:
z pressing button T again,
z switching off the ignition,
z switching to Manual mode.
To protect against damage, the startingoff aid automatically cuts out at very high
transmission oil temperatures.
Picture no: 17699j.tif
Picture no: 17176t.tif
Winter programme T
Kickdown
Press button T if you are having problems
starting off on a slippery road surface.
Depress accelerator past resistance point:
transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on engine speed. Full engine
power is available for acceleration.
To activate
The winter programme can be activated in
automatic mode (T illuminates in
transmission display). The vehicle starts off
in 4th gear.
For safety reasons, kickdown is available in
both automatic mode and manual mode.
Automatic transmission
Engine braking
"Rocking" the car
The automatic transmission automatically
selects the driving programme with
optimal engine braking effect.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
move the selector lever from D to R in a
repeat pattern while simultaneously
applying light pressure to the accelerator
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
sudden acceleration.
As needed, lower gears can also be
selected in manual mode to increase
engine braking effect. 1st gear has the
greatest braking effect.
183
This applies only to the exceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
Picture no: 17177t.tif
Manoeuvring the vehicle
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth
during attempts to park or in garage
entrances, the vehicle’s creeping
movement can be utilised by releasing the
brake pedal.
Never actuate accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
184
Automatic transmission
Stopping the vehicle
The selector lever can be left in the chosen
gear with the engine running.
When stopping on gradients engage hand
brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent
overheating of the transmission, do not
increase engine revolutions to ensure
smooth idling while standing if a gear has
been selected.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Before leaving the vehicle, apply hand
brake, then place selector lever in
position P and remove ignition key.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P.
If the selector lever is not in the P position
when the ignition is switched off, control
indicator j in the selector lever indicator
strip flashes – see page 180, Fig. 17697 J.
Shift the selector lever to P.
If the ignition key is not removed, the
battery may be discharged if the vehicle is
then left to stand for a lengthy period of
time.
Fault
Picture no: 17544j.tif
In the event of a fault in the automatic
transmission, control indicator A
illuminates. The transmission no longer
shifts automatically. Driving can be
continued.
In manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest
gear can be engaged. For some faults, only
the highest gear is available.
Only the highest gear is available in D in
automatic mode.
Automatic transmission
185
Illumination of control indicator A can
also indicate a fault in the engine
electronics – see page 195.
For diesel engines1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT,
Z 19 DTH illumination of control
indicator A could also indicate that the
diesel fuel filter must be drained of water –
see page 270.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
Picture no: 17700j.tif
Interruption of power supply
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector
lever cannot be moved out of position P
or N.
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using
jump leads – see page 230.
If the cause is not a discharged battery,
unlock selector lever:
1. Apply hand brake.
2. Remove the ashtray – see page 102.
3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards.
1)
Sales designation – see page 284.
Picture no: 17701j.tif
4. Push the yellow catch downwards with a
screwdriver and move the selector lever
out of P.
5. Refit ashtray socket in centre console
and latch into position.
6. Refit ashtray.
Re-selecting P or N locks the selector lever
again. Have cause of power supply
interruption remedied. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
186
Driving hints
Driving hints
The first 600 miles / 1000 km
Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do
not use full throttle. Never allow the engine
to labour at low revs.
Make good use of all gears. Depress the
accelerator pedal a maximum of around
three quarters of the available pedal travel
in all gears.
Do not drive faster than three quarters of
maximum speed.
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the
first 120 miles (200 km).
Never coast with engine not
running
Many units will not function in this situation
(e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic
power steering). Driving in this manner is a
danger to yourself and others.
Brake servo unit
When the engine is not running, the brake
servo unit is no longer effective once the
brake pedal has been depressed once or
twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but
significantly greater force is required for
braking.
Electro-hydraulic power assisted
steering
If the power-assisted steering fails when
being towed with the engine switched off,
the vehicle can still be steered, but
considerably more force is required.
Driving in mountainous terrain or
with a trailer/caravan
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
cooling power is therefore independent of
the engine speed.
Since a considerable amount of heat is
generated at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift down when
climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping
with the gradient in the higher gear.
Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10% or
more, do not drive faster than 20 mph
(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h)
in 2nd gear; with automatic
transmission 3, do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in position 1.
Driving with a roof load
Do not exceed the permissible roof load –
see pages 220, 293. For reasons of safety,
distribute the load evenly and secure it
properly with retaining straps. Adjust the
tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check
and retighten the straps frequently.
Observe country-specific regulations.
Switching off the engine
When you switch off, fans in the engine
compartment may continue running for a
time to cool the engine.
Driving hints
If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
after driving in mountainous terrain: allow
the engine to idle for approximately two
minutes in order to prevent heat
accumulation.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine
After running at high engine speeds or high
engine loads, operate the engine briefly at
a low load or run in neutral for approx.
30 seconds before switching off in order to
protect the turbocharger.
Save energy – more miles
Please observe the running-in hints on the
previous page and the tips for energy
saving on the following pages.
Good, technically correct and economical
driving ensures maximum durability and
performance for your vehicle.
Overrun
The fuel supply is automatically shut off
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or when
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to
take effect, do not accelerate during
overrun and, if in manual transmission
mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent
damage to the catalytic converter, overrun
cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the
catalytic converter temperature is high.
187
Vehicles with turbocharged engine
Flow-generated noises may be audible if
the accelerator is released quickly on
account of air flow in the turbocharger.
Clutch operation
Engine speed
When driving do not use the pedal as a
foot rest; this will cause substantial clutch
wear.
Drive in a low engine speed range for each
gear as much as possible.
Warming up
Allow the engine to warm up while driving.
Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling
speed. Do not apply full throttle until the
engine has reached operating
temperature.
After a cold start, the automatic
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in
automatic mode shifts into higher gears at
higher rpm. This allows the catalytic
converter to quickly reach the temperature
required for optimum pollutant reduction.
Correct gear selection
Engine in neutral and without revving in the
lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and
driving at a speed too high for the selected
gear or transmission ratio increases wear
and fuel consumption.
Change down
When decreasing speed, shift down into
the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch
with a high-revving engine. This is
especially important when hill climbing.
Always depress the clutch pedal hard to
the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and
transmission damage.
Cooling fan
The cooling fan is controlled via a
thermoswitch and therefore only runs if
necessary.
The cooling fan automatically switches on
when the diesel particle filter is being
cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
Pedals
Do not place any objects in the foot well
which could slip under the pedals and
inhibit the pedal travel.
To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
there must be no mats in the area of the
pedals.
Battery care
When driving slowly or when the vehicle is
stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all
unnecessary electrical loads where
possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated
seats).
Declutch when starting in order to relieve
the strain on the starter and the battery.
188
Saving fuel, Protecting the environment
Saving fuel,
Protecting the
environment
New painting techniques employ water as
a solvent.
End-of-life vehicle recovery
For detailed information on Vauxhall’s
ongoing commitment to achieving an
environmentally sustainable future,
including; design for recycling, take back of
End-of-Life Vehicles (ELVs) and the
recycling of ELVs view
www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details.
Energy and environmentconscious driving
Trend-setting technology
When developing and manufacturing your
vehicle, Vauxhall used environmentfriendly and in the main recyclable
materials. The production methods used to
make your vehicle are likewise
environmentally-compatible.
Recycling of production wastes keeps the
circulation of material closed. Reduction of
energy and water requirements also helps
to conserve natural resources.
A highly advanced design means that your
vehicle can be easily disassembled at the
end of its working life, and the individual
materials separated for subsequent re-use.
Materials such as asbestos and cadmium
are not used. The refrigerant in the air
conditioning system 3 is CFC-free.
z High noise levels and exhaust emissions
are often a result of driving without due
attention to saving energy and
protecting the environment.
z You should therefore drive with energy in
mind "more miles – less fuel".
Reduce the noise level and exhaust
emissions by adopting an environmentconscious driving style. This is extremely
worthwhile and improves the quality of
life.
Fuel consumption depends to a great
extent on your own personal driving
style. The following hints are intended to
help you consume fuel at a rate that is as
close as possible to the specified levels –
see page 287.
Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption
every time you refuel. This facilitates
early detection of any irregularities
causing increased fuel consumption.
Warming up
z Full throttle and warming up at idle
speed increase wear, fuel consumption,
exhaust emission, the amount of
pollutant in the exhaust and the amount
of noise.
z Drive off as soon as possible after
starting.
Uniform speed
z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
consumption, the exhaust emissions, the
proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
gas and the noise level.
z Do not accelerate and brake
unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed,
watching the road.
Avoid frequent starting off and stopping
e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance
traffic and in queues of traffic by means
of clever planning. Select roads with
good traffic flow.
Idling
z The engine also consumes fuel when
idling.
z If you have to wait for more than one
minute, it is worthwhile switching off the
engine. Five minutes of idling
corresponds to approximately 0.6 mile
(1 km)of driving.
Saving fuel, Protecting the environment
Overrun
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or
when braking – see page 187.
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come
into action and save fuel, do not
accelerate or declutch during overrun.
Correct gear selection
z High revs increase engine wear and fuel
consumption.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at
high engine speeds.
Making use of the tachometer helps to
save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed
range for each gear as much as possible
with uniform engine speeds. Drive as
often as possible in top gear, select the
next higher gear as soon as possible,
and only change down when the engine
is no longer running perfectly smoothly.
High speed
z The higher the speed, the higher the
consumption and the noise level. At top
speed, you consume a great deal of fuel
and produce excessive noise and
exhaust emissions.
z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal
results in distinct fuel savings with no
major loss of speed.
Drive at no more than around three
quarters of maximum speed and you will
use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a
great deal of time.
Tyre pressure
z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to
higher road resistance, costs money in
two ways: for more fuel and increased
tyre wear.
z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off.
Electrical loads
z The power consumption of electrical
equipment increases fuel consumption.
z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads
(e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear
window) when not needed.
Roof racks, ski-holders
z Due to air resistance, a roof load can
increase fuel consumption by approx.
3.5 gal/h (1 l/100 km).
z Remove them if they are not being used.
189
Repair and maintenance
z Improper repairs or adjustment and
maintenance work can increase fuel
consumption. Do not carry out work on
the engine yourself.
You may out of ignorance infringe
environmental laws by not disposing of
materials properly.
Appropriate parts might not be recycled.
Contact with some of the materials
involved may pose a health hazard.
z We recommend that repair and
maintenance be entrusted to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Extreme driving conditions
z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
on poor roads and winter driving all
increase fuel consumption.
Fuel consumption increases dramatically
in urban traffic and at winter
temperatures, especially on short trips
when the engine operating temperature
is not reached.
z Follow the hints given above to keep
consumption to a minimum under such
conditions.
190
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling
Fuel consumption,
fuel, refuelling
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption is determined under
specific driving conditions – see page 287.
Special equipment increases the weight of
the vehicle. As a result, they can increase
fuel consumption and reduce the specified
maximum speed.
For the first few thousand miles, friction
between the engine and transmission
components is higher. This increases fuel
consumption.
Fuel for petrol engines
Fuel consumption ................................
Fuel for petrol engines ........................
Fuel for diesel engines.........................
Fuel filler cap........................................
Refuelling..............................................
190
190
191
191
191
Normal commercial high-quality fuels with
a maximum ethanol content of 5% in
accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable
(for catalytic converter see page 193, for
octane numbers see pages 284, 285). The
quality thereof has considerable effect on
the performance, running and service life
of the engine. The additives mixed with the
fuel are extremely important. For this
reason you must only refuel with highquality fuels containing additives.
The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted
in vehicles with the Z 22 YH1) engine or the
Vectra VXR.
Pump nozzles for leaded fuel cannot be
inserted into the filler neck of vehicles that
operate on unleaded fuel.
The ignition timing adjusts automatically
to the grade of fuel used (octane number)
– see pages 284, 285.
Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95
will ensure economical driving.
Fuel with 95 RON will result in less power
and torque with the Vectra VXR.
Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5%
do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must
not be used unless the vehicle has been
specifically developed and approved for
these fuels.
Fuel with too low an octane number can
cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held
liable for resulting damage.
Petrol with a higher octane number can
always be used.
1)
Sales designation – see page 284.
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling
Fuel for diesel engines
Diesel engines must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel meeting
the specifications of DIN EN 590.
Since January 2004, some oil companies
have mixed their diesel fuel with upto 5%
Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in
accordance with the current DIN EN 590
and does not harm the fuel/injection
system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel
mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not
differ from conventional diesel fuel and do
not influence the vehicle’s driveability.
Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME
according to DIN EN 590 must not be
confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not
to be used in Vauxhall engines.
The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are
temperature-dependent.
Diesel fuels with improved low temperature
properties are therefore available on the
market during the winter months. Make
sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel
before the start of the cold weather
season.
Additives can be used with diesel fuels with
winter properties that are guaranteed by
the manufacturer and when using diesel
fuel filters that are heated depending on
the outside temperature.
Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels
that are intended for petrol engines.
191
Fuel filler cap
If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use
a genuine Vauxhall fuel filler cap for your
model to ensure full functionality. Dieselengined vehicles have special fuel filler
caps.
Picture no: 17197t.tif
Refuelling
9 Warning
Care must be taken when handling fuel.
Before refuelling, turn off engine and also
shut off external heaters with combustion
chambers (identified by stickers on fuel
filler cap). Switch off mobile phones.
The tank display updates more quickly if
the ignition is switched off during
refuelling.
192
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling
Correct filling depends to a large extent on
proper operation of the fuel dispensing
pump:
9 Warning
Fuel is flammable and explosive. Avoid
naked flames and sparks when handling
fuel, and even in the vicinity of fuel. Do
not smoke! This also applies if the
presence of fuel is only noticeable due to
the smell of fuel. If you smell fuel inside
the vehicle, have the cause checked out
immediately. We recommend that you
use your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it
on.
2. After an automatic shut-off the nominal
capacity of the fuel tank is reached by
means of two metered top-ups. Insert
fuel dispensing pump as far as it will go.
To close, position the fuel filler cap and
rotate past the resistance until the cap
audibly clicks over the retainer.
Picture no: 17198t.tif
Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.
The tank flap is locked together with the
doors – see page 66.
Open the tank flap.
To open, unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove
and suspend from the tank flap.
The fuel tank has a limiting system which
prevents overfilling of the tank.
Close fuel tank cover.
Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
Catalytic converter,
exhaust gases
Damage to the catalytic converter or the
vehicle may result if the following points
are not observed:
z Consult a workshop, such as your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly
as possible in the event of misfiring,
irregular engine running following a cold
start, a significant loss of engine power
or other unusual malfunctions which
may indicate a fault in the ignition
system. If necessary, driving may be
continued for a short time at a low speed
and with a low engine speed.
Picture no: 17199t.tif
Catalytic converter for petrol
engines
Catalytic converter for petrol engines
Catalytic converter for diesel engines
Controlling exhaust emission..............
Exhaust gases ......................................
Maintenance ........................................
193
193
194
195
196
197
Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic
converter and parts of the electronic
system, rendering them inoperative.
Use of high-quality fuels other than those
specified on page 190 (e.g. LRP1)) could
damage the catalytic converter.
On vehicles with a catalytic converter, the
fuel tank filler neck is of a narrow design so
that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel
cannot be inserted.
1)
LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
engine power when the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP®Plus 3) comes
into action are the result of operating
conditions and are therefore of no
significance - see page 198.
6
194
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic
converter, this may result in overheating
and irreparable damage to the catalytic
converter.
You should therefore avoid
unnecessarily long use of the starter
when starting off, running the tank dry
(an irregular fuel supply will lead to
overheating) and starting the engine by
pushing or towing.
z If the emission control indicator Z
flashes, slow down until the flashing
stops and the control indicator is steady.
Consult a workshop immediately. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer. For emission control indicator
Z – see page 195.
Catalytic converter for diesel
engines
Damage to the catalytic converter or the
vehicle may result if the following points
are not observed:
z Consult a workshop, such as your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly
as possible in the event of irregular
engine running, a significant loss of
engine power or other unusual
malfunctions. If necessary, driving may
be continued for a short time at a low
speed and with a low engine speed.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
engine power when the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP®Plus 3) comes
into action are the result of operating
conditions and are therefore of no
significance - see page 198.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
195
Flashing with the engine running indicates
a fault that may damage the catalytic
converter. You can continue to drive
without causing damage by slowing down
until the flashing stops and the control
indicator is steady. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17532j.tif
Controlling exhaust emission
Through design-related measures – mainly
in the area of the fuel-injection and ignition
systems – the proportion of noxious
materials in the exhaust, such as carbon
monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and
nitrogen oxides (NOx), is reduced to a
minimum.
Picture no: 17702j.tif
Control indicator Z for exhaust
Illuminates when the ignition is switched on
and during the start attempt. Goes off
shortly after the engine starts running.
If it illuminates while the engine running
there is a fault in the emission control
system. The permitted emission values may
be exceeded. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
196
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
In some cases, the fault can be remedied
by switching the engine off and on again. If
the control indicator illuminates again
when the engine is running, consult a
workshop to have the cause of the fault
remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it
is of no significance.
Picture no: 17544j.tif
Control indicator A for engine
electronics
Illuminates for a few seconds after the
ignition is switched on.
If it illuminates when the engine is running,
there is a fault in engine or transmission
electronics. The electronic system switches
to an emergency running programme. Fuel
consumption may be increased and the
driveability of the vehicle may be impaired.
Illumination of A can also be an
indication of water in the diesel fuel filter in
engines1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT and
Z 19 DTH. Have the fuel filter checked for
water residue. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
If it flashes after the ignition is switched on,
there is a fault in the immobiliser system.
The engine cannot be started. See
page 63.
1)
Sales designation – see page 284
Exhaust gases
9 Warning
Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous
carbon monoxide, which is colourless and
odourless and could be fatal if inhaled.
If exhaust fumes penetrate the vehicle
interior, open the windows and consult a
workshop immediately. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
During the first drive smoke may develop
because of wax and oil evaporating on the
exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the
open for a while after the first drive and
avoid inhaling the fumes.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
Diesel particle filter 3
The diesel particle system filter polluting
soot particles out of the exhaust.
The system contains a self-cleaning
function at certain intervals. The filter is
cleaned by burning the soot particles at
high temperature, This procedure runs
automatically under certain vehicle
conditions and can take up to 25 minutes,
during which time fuel consumption may
increase. The smell and the noise that
occur are normal.
The system cannot automatically clean
itself under certain vehicle conditions such
as driving short distances.
If the control indicator ! flashes, you
should continue driving and as soon as the
road and traffic situation permits it,
increase speed to more than 25 mph
(40 km/h) and diesel particle filter cleaning
will start. Cleaning is quicker at faster
speeds and under load. The engine speed
should not drop below 2000 rpm. The
control indicator goes off as soon as
cleaning is complete.
We recommend that you do not turn the
ignition off during cleaning.
Maintenance
Have all maintenance work carried out at
the intervals specified by Vauxhall. We
recommend that you entrust this work to
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who
has proper equipment and trained
personnel available. Electronic testing
systems permit rapid diagnosis and
remedy of faults. This way you can be
certain that all components of the vehicle’s
electrical, injection and ignition systems
operate correctly, that your vehicle has a
low level of pollutant emission and that the
catalytic converter system will have a long
service life.
197
You are thereby making an important
contribution towards keeping the air clean
and compliance with emissions legislation.
Checking and adjustment of the
fuel injection and ignition systems is part of
the scope of inspection. For this reason you
should have all maintenance work carried
out at the intervals specified in your Service
Booklet.
198
Drive Control Systems
Drive Control Systems
Interactive Driving System
(IDS+ = Interactive Driving
System) 3
The IDS+ combines the sensors and control
units of the Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®Plus), the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) and Continuous Damping Control
(CDC). This provides both excellent driving
dynamics and greater safety.
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®Plus ) 3
Interactive Driving System ..................
Electronic Stability Program ...............
Cruise control 3 ...................................
Parking distance sensor 3 ..................
Automatic level control 3 ...................
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 ...
198
198
202
204
206
206
ESP®Plus improves driving stability when
necessary in any driving situation
regardless of the type of road surface or
tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels
from spinning.
The system monitors vehicle movements.
As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve
(understeers/oversteers) engine output is
reduced (the sound of the engine changes)
and individual wheels are specifically
braked. This considerably improves the
driving stability of the vehicle on snow and
ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
ESP®Plus is ready for operation as soon as
the ignition is switched on and control
indicator v goes out.
Control indicator v flashes when ESP®Plus
is in action.
The vehicle is now in a critical situation;
ESP®Plus allows you to keep control of the
vehicle and reminds you to match your
speed to the road conditions.
9 Warning
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into taking risks when driving.
Traffic safety can only be achieved by
adopting a responsible driving style.
Drive Control Systems
199
Illuminates while driving
The system is switched off or a fault has
occurred. The vehicle can continue to be
driven. However, driving stability may
worsen depending on the nature of the
road surface.
Reactivate ESP®Plus or have the cause of
the fault remedied. We recommend that
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer. The system’s integrated selfdiagnostics allow faults to be quickly
remedied.
Picture no: 17703j.tif
Control indicator v
Illuminates for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on. The system is now
ready for operation.
Flashing during driving
This shows the system has come into
action. The engine output may be reduced
(the sound of the engine changes) and the
vehicle may be braked automatically to a
small degree.
Picture no: 17704j.tif
Switching off 3
ESP®Plus can be deactivated by pressing
button v 3.
Deactivation is only possible up to a speed
of 40 mph (60 km/h) and is indicated by
illumination of control indicator v on the
instrument panel.
Pressing the v button again or turning on
the ignition switches ESP®Plus on again.
200
Drive Control Systems
Continuous Damping Control 3
(CDC)
Normal mode
CDC automatically adapts vehicle
damping to the current driving situation
and road conditions.
The system continually monitors wheel and
vehicle movements and immediately
modifies the damping of each shock
absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally
adapted to the driving situation and road
conditions.
Continuous Damping Control is always in
normal mode with the ignition is switched
on. If desired, the system can be switched
to SPORT mode.
In SPORT mode, the damping control is
adapted to a sportier driving style, among
other things. This adaptation results in a
"harder" suspension setting.
SPORT mode - see next column.
SPORT mode
In SPORT mode the damping, the steering
and the acceleration are modified while
driving, as are the shifting points if the
vehicle has automatic transmission 3.
Damping and steering become more direct
and provide better contact with the road
surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
accelerator movements.
With automatic transmission 3 the shift
times are reduced and gear changes occur
at higher engine speeds (not when cruise
control 3 is active).
Picture no: 17705j.tif
Activating SPORT mode
Press the SPORT button. The LED in the
button illuminates.
In vehicles with automatic transmission 3
the control indicator 1 also illuminates in
the transmission display.
If the winter programme has been
switched on 3 (vehicles with automatic
transmission 3) SPORT mode cannot be
activated.
Winter programme – see page 182.
Drive Control Systems
Deactivating SPORT mode
Briefly press the SPORT button again. The
LED in the button goes out. The Continuous
Damping Control system resumes Normal
mode.
201
The system’s integrated self-diagnostics
allows faults to be quickly remedied.
SPORT mode is switched off by switching
on the ignition or switching off the winter
programme 3 (vehicles with automatic
transmission 3).
Winter programme – see page 182.
Picture no: 17706j.tif
Control indicator u for Continuous
Damping Control or SPORT mode fault
Illuminates for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on. If the control
indicator does not go out or illuminates
while driving, there is a fault in the
Continuous Damping Control or SPORT
mode system. The system is not
operational. Have the cause of the fault
remedied. We recommend that you consult
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
202
Drive Control Systems
Cruise control 3
Cruise control can store and maintain
speeds of approx. 20 to 125 mph
(30 to 200 km/h). Deviation from the saved
speed is possible on uphill or downhill
inclines.
For safety reasons, cruise control cannot
be activated until the foot brake has been
activated.
Cruise control is operated with buttons m,
g, and § on the turn signal stalk.
Do not use the cruise control if it is not
advisable to maintain a constant speed
(e.g. in situations presenting a danger to
yourself and other road users, in heavy
traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy
roads).
With automatic transmission 3, only use
cruise control in D or in automatic mode
with Easytronic 3.
When the cruise control is active, reaction
times may be increased due to the different
position of the feet.
9 Warning
Even with cruise control activated, the
driver has full responsibility for
maintaining an appropriate speed.
Disregard of these instructions could lead
to injury or danger to life.
Picture no: 17707j.tif
Control indicator m
Illuminates for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on. The system is now
ready for operation.
When driving, control indicator m will
illuminates as soon as the system is
switched on.
Drive Control Systems
Decelerate
With cruise control active, hold down
button g or briefly press it repeatedly:
speed is reduced continuously or in steps of
1.2 mph (2 km/h).
When button g is released the current
speed is stored and maintained.
203
To deactivate
Briefly press button §: Cruise control is
switched off, control indicator m goes out
and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To
continue driving, depress the accelerator
pedal in the usual manner.
For reasons of safety, cruise control
deactivates under certain driving
conditions.
For example:
z the vehicle’s speed drops below
approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or
Picture no: 16990t.tif
To activate
Briefly press button m: the current speed is
stored and maintained. The accelerator
pedal can be released.
Vehicle speed can be increased by
depressing the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the
previously stored speed is resumed.
Increase
With cruise control active, hold down
button m or briefly press it repeatedly:
speed is increased continuously or in steps
of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the
accelerator pedal.
When button m is released the current
speed is stored and maintained.
z the brake pedal is depressed or
z the clutch pedal is depressed or
z selector lever of automatic
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N.
Resuming the stored speed
Briefly press button g at a speed above 20
mph (30 km/h): the speed selected before
the cruise control was switched off is
resumed.
The stored speed value is deleted when the
ignition is switched on.
204
Drive Control Systems
Picture no: 17708j.tif
Parking distance sensor 3
The parking distance sensor makes reverse
parking easier by measuring the distance
between the vehicle and an obstacle, and
giving an acoustic signal in the passenger
compartment.
Picture no: 17709j.tif
The system registers distance by means of
four sensors in each of the front and rear
bumpers.
Picture no: 17710j.tif
To activate
With the ignition switched on, the front and
rear parking distance sensor systems are
automatically activated when reverse gear
is engaged.
The parking distance sensor can also be
activated at speeds of less than 15 mph
(25 km/h) by pressing the r button on
the instrument panel.
An illuminated LED and an acoustic signal
indicate that it is ready for operation.
Drive Control Systems
Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3,
Caravan/trailer towing
The system automatically detects if a
towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to
the front or rear, an series of signals is
sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval
between the signals becomes shorter as
the distance is reduced. If the distance is
less than 30 cm, the signal will be
continuous.
When towing, inserting the trailer plug in
the socket automatically switches off the
parking distance sensor.
9 Warning
Under certain circumstances, various
reflective surfaces on objects or clothing
as well as external noise sources may
cause the system to fail to detect
obstacles. For this reason, care must be
taken when reversing even if the parking
distance sensor is operational. This is of
particular importance when in the vicinity
of pedestrians.
To deactivate
To deactivate the system, press button r
again, the LED in the button will go dark.
The system switches itself off automatically
when the forwards speed exceeds
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h).
205
Fitting rear load racks 3
Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted
near the sensors could disrupt the system.
Picture no: 17711j.tif
Control indicator r
Illuminated
Fault in the system. The system is not ready
for operation. Have the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
If it flashes
The fault is due to sensors obstructed with
snow or ice. The sensors must be
undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice.
Interference due to external sources of
ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary
machines). Once the source of interference
is removed, the system will operate
normally.
206
Drive Control Systems
The vehicle is automatically raised at the
rear, increasing the spring travel and
ground clearance.
The automatic level control system is
activated after approx. 2 miles (3 km),
depending on the vehicle loading and the
nature of the road surface.
Headlight range adjustment
– see page 129.
Picture no: 17712j.tif
Automatic level control 3
Automatic level control makes it possible to
keep the height of the vehicle constant
when subjected to different loads in the
rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer).
This significantly improves driving
conditions.
In the event of malfunctions, do not utilise
the vehicle’s full load capacity. Have the
cause remedied without delay. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system 3
The tyre pressure monitoring system
continuously monitors the pressure of all
four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.
A pressure sensor is integrated in each
wheel. Once each minute, the pressure of
each tyre is sent to a control unit for
comparision. if the system detects one or
more pressure differences, control
indicator w illuminates or flashes red. In
vehicles with check control 3, the exact
pressure of the tyre in question appears in
the information display.
In vehicles with graphical information
display 3 or colour information display 3
and trip computer 3, current tyre pressures
can be shown in the information display.
For the system to be operational, all wheels
must be equipped with pressure sensors
and all tyres must be inflated to the
prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure
monitoring system automatically detects if
the vehicle is being driven with a load of up
to 3 persons or a full load.
Drive Control Systems
Once the ignition is switched on, the system
is operational and will continuously
monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of
approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above.
9 Warning
The tyre pressure monitoring system does
not replace manual checks with a
suitable gauge.
Check tyre pressures at least every
14 days and prior to any long journey;
the tyres should be checked when cold.
Don’t forget to check the spare 3.
Tyre pressure – see pages 215, 299.
207
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Picture no: 17334t.tif
Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Tyres from the Board
Computer menu.
The current pressure of each tyre is
displayed.
Picture no: 17713j.tif
Control indicator w in red
as warning message
Illumination in red while driving indicates
deviating tyre pressure.
Indicator illuminates red
Minor tyre pressure difference; slow down.
Check tyre pressure at next opportunity
with a suitable gauge and correct if
necessary.
Indicator flashes red
Considerable pressure difference or direct
loss of pressure! Stop immediately and
check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare
wheel if necessary, see pages 236, 238.
208
Drive Control Systems
Warning messages in the graphical
information display 3 or colour
information display 3
In the version with check control 3 differing
tyre pressures while driving are indicated
by messages on the information display.
The message appears in abbreviated form
depending on the version.
For example, the following messages can
be displayed:
Navi active
Navi active
Tyre pressure
Attention!
check rear
left tyre
(value in bar)
Front left tyre
pressure loss
(value in bar)
OK
Picture no: 17353t.tif
A graphic 3 indicating the left rear tyre is
shown together with the current tyre
pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce
speed. Check pressure at next opportunity
with appropriate gauge and correct if
necessary.
On the colour information display this
report will appear in yellow.
OK
Picture no: 17354t.tif
A diagram 3 appears at the same time,
marking the front left tyre and showing the
current tyre pressure: Considerable
pressure difference or direct loss of
pressure! Exit flow of traffic as soon as
possible without obstructing other vehicles,
stop and check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit
spare wheel if necessary, see
pages 236, 238.
On the colour information display this
report will appear in red.
Acknowledgement of warnings
– see page 50.
Drive Control Systems
General information
The spare tyre or temporary spare wheel is
not equipped with a pressure sensor. If the
spare tyre or temporary spare wheel is
used the tyre pressure monitoring system
will not work for this wheel, and the control
indicator w will illuminate yellow. The
system remains operational for the other
three wheels.
Picture no: 17713j.tif
Control indicator w in yellow
as fault message
If control indicator w illuminates yellow
while driving, there is a fault in the tyre
pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel
without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel)
will also generate a fault in the system.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
If a complete set of wheels that do not have
tyre pressure monitoring system sensors is
used, (e.g. four winter tyres or retrofitting
of a different size tyre) no warning
message is displayed. The system is not
operational.
Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring
system can be retrofitted. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
209
When manually checking tyre pressure with
a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto
the valve. Tyre pressure – see page 215.
The tyre pressure monitoring system valve
cores and sealing rings must be replaced
each time the tyres are changed. We
recommend that you contact your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The use of commercially available liquid
filled run-flat systems or repair kits can
impair the function of the system.
Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.
Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones,
walkie-talkies) operated in the area could
cause interference in the tyre pressure
monitoring system.
210
Brakes
Brakes
Brake system
The brakes are an important factor for
traffic safety.
To improve effectiveness, do not brake
unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles
(200 km) after new brake pads have been
fitted.
Brake pad wear must not exceed a
specified limit. Regular maintenance as
detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore
of the utmost importance for traffic safety.
Brake system........................................ 210
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)........ 212
Have worn brake pads replaced. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that
have been tested and approved by
Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking
power.
Picture no: 17206t.tif
Brake assist
If the brake pedal is slammed on, the
vehicle is automatically braked with
maximum brake force amplification in
order to achieve the shortest possible
braking distance when full-on braking
occurs (braking assist).
Maintain steady pressure on the brake
pedal for as long as full-on braking is to
continue. When the brake pedal is
released, the maximum brake force
amplification is taken away.
Adaptive brake light
During full-on braking, all three brake
lights flash for the duration of ABS control.
Brakes
Foot brake
The foot brake comprises two independent
brake circuits.
If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be
braked using the other brake circuit. If this
occurs, however, the brake pedal must be
depressed quite far using considerable
force before braking effect occurs. The
distance required for braking will be
greater. Consult a workshop before
continuing your journey. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
To ensure that full pedal travel – can be
utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one
of the brake circuits, there must be no mats
in the pedal area, see page 187.
When the engine is not running, the
support of the brake servo unit disappears
once the brake pedal has been depressed
once or twice. Braking effect is not
reduced, but braking requires significantly
greater force. This is especially important
to bear in mind when towing.
211
Check the brake lights before starting out
on a journey. On vehicles with check
control 3 the brake lights are checked
automatically – see page 58.
Shortly after starting each journey the
effectiveness of the brake system should
be tested at low speed and without
inconveniencing other traffic, especially if
the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle
has been washed.
The brake fluid level should be checked
regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low
and the hand brake is not applied, control
indicator R on the instrument panel
illuminates – see page 35.
Picture no: 17714j.tif
Hand brake
Always apply handbrake firmly, and as
firmly as possible on uphill or downhill
slopes. Fold up armrest 3 to do this.
The mechanical hand brake acts on the
brakes on the rear wheels. It engages
automatically when applied.
To release the hand brake pull the lever up
slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully
lower the lever.
To reduce the operating forces of the hand
brake, depress the foot brake at the same
time.
212
Brakes
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)
ABS continually monitors the brake system
and prevents the wheels from locking
regardless of the type of road surface or
tyre grip.
Picture no: 17715j.tif
Brake system control indicator R
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on if the hand brake is
applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is
too low. Brake fluid – see page 272.
9 Warning
If the control indicator illuminates when
the hand brake is not applied: Stop.
Interrupt your journey immediately.
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
It starts to regulate the braking pressure as
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The vehicle remains steerable, even in the
event of very heavy braking, for instance
on bends or when swerving to avoid an
obstacle. Even in the case of full-on
braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive
round an obstacle without releasing the
brakes.
ABS control is made apparent though a
pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of
the regulation process.
9 Warning
For optimum braking, keep the brake
pedal fully depressed throughout the
braking process, despite the fact that the
pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the
pressure on the pedal.
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into taking risks when driving.
Traffic safety can only be achieved by
adopting a responsible driving style.
Brakes
9 Warning
If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may
be subject to locking due to braking that
is heavier than normal. The advantages
of ABS are no longer operational. The
vehicle can no longer be steered and may
swerve.
You can continue driving, provided you
drive with care and anticipation.
Picture no: 17716j.tif
Control indicator u for ABS
The control indicator illuminates for several
seconds when the ignition is switched on
and the system undergoes a self-check at
the same time (may be audible). The
system is ready for operation when the
control indicator goes out.
If the control indicator does not go out
after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while
driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The
brake system remains operational without
ABS regulation.
213
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
214
Wheels, tyres
Wheels, tyres
Tyres
See page 297 for suitable tyres and
restrictions.
Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to
the chassis and provide optimum driving
comfort and safety.
Changing tyre/wheel type
Before switching to different tyres or
wheels, seek advice on the technical
possibilities. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer,
who will be able to advise you of any
necessary modifications.
Tyres .....................................................
Changing tyre/wheel type...................
Tyre pressure........................................
Tyre condition, wheel condition .........
Winter tyres 3 ......................................
Wheel trims 3.......................................
Tyre chains 3 .......................................
214
214
215
217
219
219
219
If tyres of a different size than those fitted
at the factory are used, the electronic
speedometer may require reprogramming
to ensure that the correct speed is
displayed.
9 Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may
lead to accidents and render the vehicle
unroadworthy.
Vehicles with
tyre pressure monitoring system 3
If winter tyres or tyres of a different size are
fitted, tyre pressure monitoring system
sensors can be retrofitted if so desired.
Otherwise, the system will not indicate tyre
pressure deviations. We recommend that
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3
– see page 206.
Wheels, tyres
Fitting new tyres
Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even
better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are
z the same size,
z the same design,
z the same make,
z and have the same tread pattern.
Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
direction of travel. The rolling direction is
indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
the sidewall.
Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
(e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be
refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
way to obtain full benefit from the design
properties of the tyre.
9 Warning
We recommend that you have your tyres
changed by your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will be familiar with the
requirements of the law as regards
disposal of tyres and can thus help to
protect the environment and your health.
215
Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge
for alloy wheels to protect against
damage. If wheel trim is used on steel
wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the
following procedure must be followed:
z Use wheel trims and tyres that are
approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in
question and therefore meet all the
requirements pertaining to the
respective wheel/tyre combination.
z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not
have a beaded edge.
9 Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims
could lead to sudden loss of air and
thereby accidents.
Picture no: 17211t.tif
Tyre pressure
Check tyre pressures, including the spare
wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to
any long journey; the tyres should be
checked when cold. Don’t forget to check
the spare.
Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing
the valve caps easier. The key is located on
the inside of the tank flap.
6
216
Wheels, tyres
Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by
adjusting the inflation pressure.
9 Warning
Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat
tyre.
Picture no: 17212t.tif
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
attaching tyre pressure gauge, see
page 206.
Tyre pressure – see page 299 and the
adhesive foil on the inside of the tank flap.
Have adhesive foil replaced after changing
to different tyre size.
Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm. Otherwise the pressure may
drop below the permissible minimum when
the tyres cool down.
Picture no: 17213t.tif
After having checked the tyre pressures,
tighten the valve caps using the valve cap
key.
Incorrect inflation pressures will impair
safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel
economy and will increase tyre wear.
If the pressure is too low, this can result in
considerable tyre warm-up and internal
damage, leading to tread separation and
even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.
Wheels, tyres
217
Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign
bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in
sidewalls). Check wheels for damage. In
the event of damage or abnormal wear,
consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
9 Warning
Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.
Picture no: 17214t.tif
Tyre condition, wheel condition
Drive over edges slowly and at a right
angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges
can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel
damage which is only noticed later on.
When parking, ensure that the tyres are not
pressed against the edge of the kerb.
Picture no: 17215t.tif
Tread depth
Check tread depth regularly.
If wear in the front is greater than that in
the rear, move the rear wheels to the front
axle and vice versa.
Correct tyre pressure.
For reasons of safety, tyres should be
replaced when their tread depth has worn
down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).
218
Wheels, tyres
General information
z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if
the tyres are worn.
z Tyres age, even if they are used only very
little or not at all. A spare wheel which
has not been used for six years should be
used only in emergencies; drive slowly
when using such tyres.
z Never fit used tyres the previous history
and use of which you do not know.
Picture no: 17216t.tif
The legally permissible minimum tread
depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when
the tread has worn down as far as one of
the wear indicators (TWI1)). A number of
wear indicators are spaced at equal
intervals around the tyre within the tread.
Their position is indicated by markings on
the tyre sidewall.
1)
TWI = Tread Wear Indicator.
z So as not to impair brake cooling, use
only wheel trims approved for use on
your vehicle.
Tyre designations
Meanings:
e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H
195 = Tyre width in mm
65 = Aspect ratio
(tyre height to tyre width) in %
R = Belt type: Radial
15 = Rim diameter in inches
91 = Load index
e.g.: 91 represents 618 kg
H = Speed code
Speed code letters:
Q
S
T
H
V
W
Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
Up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Wheels, tyres
Winter tyres 3
Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into
contact with parts of the chain and be
damaged. Remove the wheel trim
– see page 239.
For notes on fitting new tyres – see
page 215.
See page 299 for restrictions.
Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up
to 30 mph (50 km/h)1). When driving on
roads that are free of snow, they may only
be used for brief periods since they are
subject to rapid wear on hard roads and
could snap.
Winter tyres improve safety at
temperatures below 7 °C and should
therefore be fitted on all the wheels.
The design of summer tyres means they
have limited qualities for winter driving.
If the maximum permissible speed for the
winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle,
a notice indicating the maximum
permissible speed for the tyres must be
affixed within the driver’s field of vision1).
If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted
with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s
driveability may be affected, especially on
slippery road surfaces. Obtain a
replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as
possible, and have the wheel balanced
and fitted to the vehicle.
Wheel trims 3
If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the
tyres do not have a beaded edge, see
page 215.
1)
Varies from country to country on account of
national regulations.
219
Limitations and further information
– see page 299.
Temporary wheel 3
Tyre chains must not be used on the
temporary spare wheel. If you need to use
tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
fit the temporary spare on the rear axle
and transfer one of the rear wheels to the
front axle.
Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive
wheels (front axle).
For notes on the temporary spare wheel
– see page 237.
Always use fine mesh chains that add no
more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the
inboard sides (including chain lock).
Wheel changing – see page 238.
Picture no: 17217t.tif
Tyre chains 3
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Correct tyre pressure. Tyre pressure
monitoring system 3 – see page 206.
220
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
Roof Racks,
Caravan and Trailer
Towing
Picture no: 17218t.tif
Roof racks 3.........................................
Towing equipment 3...........................
Towing equipment with removable
coupling ball bar 3, Saloon /
hatch3 ...............................................
Towing equipment with pivoting
coupling ball bar 3 ...........................
Caravan and trailer loads...................
Coupling socket load...........................
Rear axle load during towing .............
Tyre pressure........................................
Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) ............
Driving characteristics, towing tips ....
Starting on inclines ..............................
220
221
221
224
225
226
226
226
226
227
228
9 Warning
Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers should be informed
accordingly.
Roof racks 3
For reasons of safety and to avoid
damaging the roof, we recommend that
you use the Vauxhall roof rack system
approved for your vehicle. Consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Fasten the roof rack following the
instructions that accompany the system.
Driving hints – see page 186.
Picture no: 17219t.tif
Version without roof railing
Fold the covers of the installation openings
up - see Fig. 17218 T.
Attach roof rack at appropriate points, see
enclosed roof luggage rack system
instructions.
Version with roof railing 3
Attach roof rack to roof railing at points
shown in figure, see enclosed roof luggage
rack system instructions.
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
221
Towing equipment 3
Use only towing equipment that has been
approved for your vehicle. We recommend
entrusting the retrofitting of towing
equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will advise you on any
possible towed load increases. Your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has
instructions on how to install the towing
equipment and make any necessary
changes to the vehicle that affect the
cooling system, the heat shields or other
equipment.
9 Warning
The coupling ball bar is to be removed
when not towing.
For installation dimensions of the trailer
towing equipment – see pages 311, 311.
Picture no: 17729j.tif
Towing equipment with
removable coupling ball bar 3,
Saloon / hatch3
Stowage of coupling ball bar
The coupling ball bar is stored in a bag
strapped to the spare wheel.
Picture no: 17717j.tif
Fitting the coupling ball bar
Compress the sealing plugs at the ends
and pull out of the opening for the coupling
ball bar. Stow the sealing plugs in the
luggage compartment. Disengage socket
and fold down 3.
6
222
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
Picture no: 17718j.tif
Checking the tensioning of the coupling
ball bar
z Red marking on turn knob points
towards green marking on coupling ball
bar.
z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between
rotary knob and coupling ball bar.
z Key is in lock.
Picture no: 17719j.tif
Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be
tensioned before it is inserted into the
coupling housing:
z Open coupling ball bar.
z Pull turn knob out and then turn it
clockwise as far as it will go – see figure.
Picture no: 17720j.tif
Inserting the coupling ball bar
Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into
the coupling housing and push firmly
upwards until the coupling ball bar
engages in position.
The turn knob snaps back into its home
position resting against the coupling ball
bar.
9 Warning
Do not touch the turn knob when
inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of
injury.
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
223
Important
Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly
installed:
z Red marking on turn knob points
towards white marking on coupling ball
bar.
z No gap between turn knob and coupling
ball bar.
z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly
in coupling housing.
Picture no: 17721j.tif
Open coupling ball bar. Remove key and
put on provided protective clip.
When the coupling ball bar is locked the
turn knob can no longer be pulled out.
z Coupling ball bar must be locked and
key must be removed.
9 Warning
Towing a caravan/trailer is only
permitted with a properly attached
coupling ball bar. If the coupling ball bar
cannot be properly attached, consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Eye for break-away stopping cable
In the case of caravans/trailers with brake,
attach the break-away stopping cable to
the eye. Eye - see Fig. 17721 J.
Picture no: 17722j.tif
Dismounting the coupling ball bar
Close coupling ball bar.
Pull the turn knob out and then turn it
clockwise as far as it will go. Pull the
coupling ball bar downwards out of the
coupling housing and stow it in the
luggage compartment – see page 221,
Fig. 17729 J.
Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the
coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket –
see page 221, Fig. 17717 J.
Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other
high-pressure cleaners to clean the
coupling ball bar.
224
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
Picture no: 17724j.tif
Towing equipment with pivoting
coupling ball bar 3
Folding out the coupling ball bar
The release lever is in the stowage
compartment to the left in the luggage
compartment.
To open the stowage compartment, push
both latches down and open the cover.
Picture no: 17725j.tif
Push the release lever down; the LED on the
lever remains illuminated as long as the
coupling ball bar is not engaged. A
warning buzzer also sounds and the
coupling ball bar pivots down.
9 Warning
Make sure that no one is in the pivot zone
of the coupling ball bar. Risk of bodily
injury.
Swivel the coupling ball bar rearwards until
it engages (see figure 17726 J). The LED
must go out and the warning buzzer must
cease. Otherwise, repeat the procedure.
Picture no: 17726j.tif
Important
Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly
engaged:
z LED is not illuminated
z No warning buzzer
9 Warning
Towing is only permissible if the coupling
ball bar is fitted properly. If the coupling
ball bar does not engage correctly, the
LED does not go out or the warning
buzzer does not stop sounding, consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
225
Caravan and trailer loads1)
Trailer with break-away cable 3
For trailers with brake, loop break-away
cable around coupling ball bar.
The permissible caravan/trailer loads are
vehicle- and engine-dependent maximum
values which must not be exceeded. The
actual caravan/trailer load is the difference
between the actual gross weight of the
caravan/trailer and the actual coupling
socket load with the caravan/trailer
attached. When the caravan/trailer load is
being checked, therefore, only the
caravan/trailer wheels – and not the jockey
wheel – must be standing on the weighing
apparatus.
Picture no: 17727j.tif
Stowing the coupling ball bar
Open the stowage compartment
– see page 224.
The permissible caravan/trailer loads for
your vehicle are given in the vehicle
documents. Unless otherwise stated, they
are valid for gradients up to max. 12%.
Push the release lever down; the LED on the
lever remains illuminated as long as the
coupling ball bar is not engaged. A
warning buzzer also sounds and the
coupling ball bar pivots down.
Pivot the coupling ball bar to the right and
up. The LED must go out and the warning
buzzer must cease, otherwise repeat the
procedure.
1)
Observe national regulations.
226
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
The permissible caravan/trailer load should
be fully utilised only by drivers who are
adequately experienced in towing large or
heavy caravans/trailers.
The permitted caravan/trailer load applies
up to the specified incline and up to an
altitude of 1000 metres above sea level.
Since engine power decreases as altitude
increases because of the air becoming
thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability,
the permitted towing weight also decreases
by 10% for every 1000 metres of additional
altitude. The towing weight does not have
to be reduced when driving on roads with
slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g.
motorways).
The actual caravan/trailer load plus the
actual gross weight of the towing vehicle
must not exceed the maximum permitted
towing weight. For example, if the
permitted gross vehicle weight is utilised,
the trailer/caravan load must only be used
until the maximum permitted towing
weight is reached. The maximum
permitted towing weight is shown on the
identification plate, see page 282.
Coupling socket load
The coupling socket load is the load
exerted by the trailer/caravan on the
coupling ball. It can be varied by changing
the weight distribution when loading the
trailer/caravan.
The maximum permissible coupling socket
load (Saloon / hatch: 78 kg, Estate: 85 kg)
is specified on the towing equipment
identification plate and in the vehicle
documents. Always aim for the maximum
load, especially in the case of heavy
caravans/trailers. The coupling socket load
should never fall below 25 kg.
When measuring the coupling socket load,
make sure that the drawbar of the loaded
trailer/caravan is at the same height as it
will be when the trailer/caravan is coupled
with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly
important for trailers/caravans with
tandem axle.
Rear axle load during towing
With the caravan/trailer coupled and the
towing vehicle fully loaded (including all
occupants), the permissible rear axle load
(see identification plate or vehicle
documents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If
the permissible rear axle load is exceeded,
a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)
applies. If national regulations specify a
slower maximum speed for vehicles towing
a caravan/trailer, this must be observed.
Picture no: 17213t.tif
Tyre pressure
Adjust the tyre pressure on the towing
vehicle to the value specified for a full load,
see page 299. Also check the pressure of
the caravan/trailer wheels and the spare
wheel.
Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA)
TSA monitors vehicle movements when
towing a caravan or trailer. If the system
detects lurching movements, engine power
is reduced and the vehicle/trailer
combination is selectively braked until the
lurching ceases.
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
Driving characteristics, towing
tips
For trailers with brake, attach break-away
cable to eye 3 or loop around coupling ball
bar if no eye available.
Before attaching the trailer/caravan,
lubricate the ball of the trailer/caravan
towing device. However, do not lubricate
the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the
coupling ball, is being used to damp
hunting.
Check caravan/trailer lighting before
starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the
vehicle are deactivated when towing a
caravan or trailer.
Caravan/trailers with LED turn signals must
have a provision that makes it possible to
monitor standard light bulbs.
Turn signal control indicator – see page 34.
The parking distance sensor system at the
rear 3 is deactivated when towing a
caravan/trailer.
227
Handling is greatly influenced by the
loading of the trailer/caravan. Loads
should therefore be secured so that they
cannot slip and be placed in the centre of
the trailer/caravan if possible, i.e. above
the axle.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
if possible, even in countries where higher
speeds are permitted.
In the case of trailers with low driving
stability or caravans with a permitted gross
vehicle weight of 1400 kg (Saloon / hatch) /
1500 kg (estate), do not exceed a speed of
50 mph (80 km/h); the use of a friction-type
stabiliser is highly recommended.
If the trailer/caravan starts to sway, drive
more slowly, do not attempt to correct the
steering and brake sharply if necessary.
Make sure that you have enough room
when cornering and avoid sudden
manoeuvres.
If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully,
depress the brake pedal as hard as
possible.
Remember that the braking distance for
vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and
without brake is always greater than that
for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer.
When driving downhill, the brakes are
under considerably more load when towing
a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in
the same gear as if driving uphill and drive
at a similar speed.
Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3
in automatic mode will automatically
select the driving programme with the
optimum engine braking effect.
228
Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing
For vehicles with automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode it is
sufficient to apply full throttle.
If necessary, the gears can also be selected
manually.
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
cooling power is therefore independent of
the engine speed.
Before starting off under extreme
conditions (high combination weight,
mountainous terrain with steep inclines),
switch off all unnecessary electrical loads
(e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning
system 3, heated seats 3).
Since a considerable amount of heat is
generated at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift down when
climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping
with the gradient in the higher gear.
Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10% or
more, do not drive faster than 20 mph
(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h)
in 2nd gear; with automatic
transmission 3, do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in position 1.
Picture no: 17730j.tif
Starting on inclines
For vehicles with manual transmission, the
most favourable engine speed when
starting off on an incline is between 2500
and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and
between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel
engines. Hold engine speed constant,
engage clutch gradually (let slip), release
hand brake and open throttle. If possible,
the engine speed should not drop during
this procedure.
Self-help
Self-help
Starting the engine with jump leads 3
Towing the vehicle...............................
Towing service .....................................
Towing another vehicle.......................
Warning triangle ¨3,
First-aid kit + 3.................................
Spare wheel 3......................................
Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............
Changing wheels .................................
Tyre repair kit 3 ...................................
Electrical system ..................................
Fuses and the most important circuits
they protect .......................................
Bulb replacement ................................
Halogen headlight system dipped
and main beam.................................
Xenon headlight system, dipped
and main beam.................................
Adaptive Forward Lighting System 3
Halogen headlight system, Xenon
headlight system, Parking lights......
Tail lights ..............................................
Number plate light ..............................
Courtesy light .......................................
9 Warning
230
232
233
233
234
236
238
238
242
246
248
252
253
255
257
257
258
261
262
Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers should be informed
accordingly.
Diesel fuel system, bleeding
Never let the tank run dry! If control
indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as
possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes.
It is possible to restart the engine if the tank
has been run dry. A delayed start is to be
expected. Switch on the ignition three times
for approx. 15 seconds. Then attempt to
start the engine for no more than
40 seconds. If the engine does not start,
wait at least 5 seconds and try again. If the
engine does not start, consult a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
229
Starting
Do not start with quick charger
This prevents damage to electronic
components.
Do not start by
pushing or towing
Because your vehicle is fitted with a
catalytic converter, it must not be started
by pushing or towing – see page 193.
The vehicle can only be started using jump
leads – see following page.
230
Self-help
Starting the engine with jump
leads 3
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be
started using jump leads and the battery of
another vehicle.
9 Warning
Be extremely careful when starting with
jump leads. Any deviation from the
following instructions can lead to injuries
or damage caused by battery explosion
or damage to the electrical systems of
both vehicles.
z Never expose the battery to naked
flames or sparks.
z A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures of around 0 °C. Always
thaw out a frozen batteries in a warm
room before attaching jump leads.
z Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or
painted surfaces. The fluid contains
sulphuric acid which can cause injuries
and damage in the event of direct
contact.
Picture no: 17229t.tif
Picture no: 17731j.tif
z Wear eye protection and protective
clothing when handling a battery.
z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers.
z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage
(12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be
considerably less than that of the
discharged battery. Voltage and
capacity information can be found on
the batteries.
z Do not lean over the battery during jump
starting.
z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
and a cross section of at least 16 mm2
(25 mm2 for diesel engines).
z Do not disconnect the discharged
battery from the vehicle.
z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
touch those of the other lead.
z Do not touch the vehicles while jump
starting.
z Apply hand brake. Manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic
transmission 3 in P.
The battery is in a box at the front of the
engine compartment, on the right-hand
side as viewed from the front. To open the
box, pull the cover forwards and swing it
upwards.
Self-help
z Do not connect leads to negative
terminal of discharged battery!
z Start the engine of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
z The connection point should be as far
away from the discharged battery as
possible.
z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
Start attempts should be made at
intervals of 1 minute not last longer than
15 seconds.
z Route the leads so that they cannot
catch on rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
Picture no: 17732j.tif
Connect the leads in the order shown in the
illustration:
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to
the positive terminal 1 of the battery
providing the jump start (identified by
"+" sign on battery case or terminal).
2. Connect the other end of this lead to the
positive terminal 2 of the discharged
battery ("+" sign).
3. Connect the first end of the other jump
lead to the negative terminal 3 of the
battery providing the start ("–" sign).
4. Connect the other end of the second
jump lead 4 to ground on the other
vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw
connection in the engine suspension.
231
z After starting, allow both engines to idle
for approx. 3 minutes with the leads
connected.
z In order to avoid excess voltage in the
electrical system, before removing a
lead, switch on an electrical consumer
(e.g. light, heated rear window) in the
vehicle receiving the jump start.
z Reverse above sequence exactly when
removing leads.
232
Self-help
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive
tractive force can damage the vehicle.
9 Warning
Significantly greater force is required for
braking: the brake servo unit is only
operational when the engine is running.
Considerably greater steering force is
necessary since this unit is operative only
when the engine is running.
Picture no: 17733j.tif
Towing the vehicle
To open the cover concealing the towing
eye at the front right of the vehicle:
disengage the cover at the bottom and pull
it off downwards.
The towing eye is located in the
compartment containing the jack and
vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in
the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack
and tools – see page 238.
Picture no: 17734j.tif
Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far
as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
position.
Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a
tow rod 3 – to the eye.
The towing eye must only be used for
towing and not recovering a vehicle.
Switch on ignition to release steering
column lock and to permit operation of
brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.
Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in
neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N.
To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from
the towing vehicle, switch on the air
recirculation 3 and close the windows.
Vehicles with automatic transmission 3
should be towed facing forward only and
must not be towed faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km).
If the transmission is defective, or if the
above speed or distance is to be exceeded,
the front axle must be raised off the
ground.
Self-help
233
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will
serve you best to get your vehicle back on
the road.
If the automatic clutch has been manually
released in vehicles with Easytronic 3
because of an interruption to the power
supply, towing is not permitted
– see page 176. In this case, consult a
workshop as soon as possible. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
After towing, unscrew towing eye by
rotating clockwise and insert and close the
cap.
Towing service
Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
service of your choice and obtain an
estimate on towing costs before employing
any towing service. In this way you avoid
unnecessary costs and possible insurance
problems during claim processing.
Picture no: 17735j.tif
Towing another vehicle
To open the cover concealing the towing
eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle:
disengage the cover at the bottom and pull
it off downwards.
The towing eye is located in the
compartment containing the jack and
vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in
the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack
and tools – see page 238.
Picture no: 17736j.tif
Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far
as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
position.
Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a
tow rod 3 – to the eye.
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive
tractive force can damage the vehicle.
After towing, unscrew towing eye by
rotating clockwise and insert and close the
cap.
234
Self-help
Picture no: 17610j.tif
Picture no: 17737j.tif
Warning triangle ¨3,
First-aid kit + 3
To access press down bar and open the
cover.
Saloon / hatch
The warning triangle and first-aid kit/
cushion are stowed in the side panel trim
on the left-hand side.
Depending on the warning triangle version,
move locking lever upward and therefore
clamp warning triangle in position.
Picture no: 17738j.tif
When loading vehicle, always ensure that
first-aid cushion or first-aid kit is accessible.
Self-help
235
When loading vehicle, always ensure that
warning triangle and first-aid cushion or
first-aid kit are accessible.
Picture no: 17724j.tif
Estate
The warning triangle and first-aid kit/
cushion are stowed in the side panel trim
on the left-hand side.
Picture no: 17739j.tif
To open, push both bars down and open
the flap.
236
Self-help
Picture no: 17740j.tif
Spare wheel 3
Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre
repair kit instead of a spare wheel. See
page 242.
Saloon / hatch
The spare wheel is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor cover. It is
secured with a plastic wing nut.
To open the floor cover, pull up the handle
or strap.
Picture no: 17741j.tif
Estate
The spare wheel is located in the luggage
compartment under the load floor. It is
secured with a plastic wing nut.
Picture no: 17742j.tif
To open the loading floor, fold out release
lever by pushing at the marked point and
raise up the loading floor all the way.
Stowing standard size tyres in the spare
wheel well
The spare wheel well is not designed for all
sizes of commercially available tyres. If a
larger wheel must be stowed in the spare
wheel well after changing wheels, place the
floor cover on the overlaying wheel.
Self-help
237
General information
Depending on the version, the spare wheel
is in the form of an temporary spare
wheel 3. Please pay attention to
instructions concerning temporary spare
wheel in the next column and on
pages 219, 242, 299.
Notes on temporary spare wheel 3
z Using a temporary spare wheel may
change the driving behaviour of the
vehicle, particularly if using winter
tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly
as possible, balance wheel and fit to
vehicle.
Notes on directional tyres 3
Directional tyres only achieve their full
performance potential when mounted in
the prescribed direction of rotation. If after
a flat tyre the tyre or spare wheel is
mounted against the prescribed direction
of rotation, observe the following:
On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare
wheel may have a steel rim.
z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.
z Driving conditions may be altered.
Replace the defective tyre as soon as
possible, balance the wheel and mount it
on the vehicle.
If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you
use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling
may be altered. Obtain a replacement for
the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and
have the wheel balanced and fitted to the
vehicle.
The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre
and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted
on the vehicle1): Using the spare wheel may
alter vehicle handling. Have the defective
tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance
the wheel and have it mounted on the
vehicle.
z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
z Take curves slowly.
z Do not use the temporary spare wheel
for a lengthy period.
z Replace temporary spare wheel with full
specification wheel without delay.
z Tyre chains are not permitted on the
temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains
have to be used after a front wheel
puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to
the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the
front axle. Check tyre pressure and
correct if necessary, see page 299.
z Please follow instructions concerning
temporary spare wheel on pages 219
and 299.
1)
Country-specific version: The spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
z Drive especially carefully in wet or snowy
weather.
For further information on directional
tyres – see page 215.
238
Self-help
Changing wheels
There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a
spare wheel – see page 242.
To ensure your safety, make the following
preparations and observe the following
information when changing wheels:
z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and nonskid surface.
Picture no: 17241t.tif
Jack £ 3 and
vehicle tools 3
The jack and the vehicle tools have been
specially developed for your vehicle and
must only be used on that vehicle. Only use
jack for changing wheels.
Vehicles with spare wheel 3: The jack and
vehicle tools are stowed in a compartment
in the luggage compartment beneath the
spare wheel. Remove the spare wheel
- see page 236.
Vehicles with tyre repair kit 3: The vehicle
tools are stowed together with the tyre
repair kit in a compartment beneath the
floor cover in the luggage compartment.
Picture no: 17242t.tif
After use, stow away the jack and tools in
the compartment as shown in illustration.
z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply
hand brake, automatic transmission 3
- selector lever in P, manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse
gear.
z Correctly set up the warning triangle.
Warning triangle – see page 234.
Self-help
z Take the spare wheel from the luggage
compartment.
z Before raising the vehicle, set the front
wheels to the straight-ahead position.
z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn
before raising the vehicle, but do not
totally unscrew the bolts.
z Never change more than one wheel at
once.
z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be changed by placing wedge
blocks or equivalent in front and behind
the wheel.
z Use the jack only to change wheels.
239
z If the ground on which the vehicle is
standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm
thick) should be placed under the jack.
Using a thicker board could damage the
jack and the vehicle.
z Apply a light coating of grease to the
cone of each wheel bolt before screwing
in the wheel bolts after a wheel change.
Some normal commercial grease will be
required for this purpose. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z No people or animals may be in the
vehicle when it is jacked up.
z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.
z Do not start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on the jack.
z Fully tighten the wheel bolts after
lowering the vehicle all the way.
Picture no: 17743j.tif
1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook
included with the vehicle tools 3. For
vehicle tools, see page 238.
If the wheel trim has visible wheel
bolts 3, the trim can remain on the
wheel. The retaining washers 3 on the
wheel bolts must not be removed.
240
Self-help
Picture no: 17244t.tif
Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt
caps with a screwdriver and remove.
Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth
between the screwdriver and ally wheel.
Picture no: 17245t.tif
2. Slacken wheel bolts using wheel bolt
wrench 3, putting on the wheel bolt
wrench 3 as far as possible.
Picture no: 17744j.tif
3. There are plastic retainers at the front
and rear of the vehicle underbody for
positioning the jack. The location of each
retainer is indicated by a mark on the
bottom edge of the vehicle.
Self-help
Picture no: 17745j.tif
4. Before attaching jack 3 set to required
height by turning the eye by hand. Fit the
jack 3 at the front – or rear – in such a
way that the jack head engages in the
plastic retainer beneath the vehicle.
Check that it is properly engaged.
The jack base must be on the ground
directly below the jacking point in a
manner that prevents it from slipping.
Picture no: 17746j.tif
Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and
turn crank to raise vehicle.
If this is not the case, carefully lower the
vehicle immediately and reposition the
jack.
5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with
a cloth. Then apply a light coating of
grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease
the thread of the bolts. Do not put the
wheel bolts down in a location where
they may become soiled.
If the wheel bolts have retaining
washers 3, they must not be removed.
241
Picture no: 17249t.tif
6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare
wheel – see page 236, notes on
temporary spare wheel – see page 237.
7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly,
inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
as possible.
8. Lower vehicle.
9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on
wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.
6
242
Self-help
10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the
wheel around the retaining clips. Valve
symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must
point towards valve on wheel.
Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt
caps 3.
Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel
bolt caps 3.
11. Stow away replaced wheel, tools and
warning triangle in the luggage
compartment, see page 238.
12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly
mounted wheel. Correct if necessary.
13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts on the new wheel checked on the
vehicle using a torque wrench as soon
as possible and, if necessary, corrected.
Tightening torque – see page 299.
14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel
that was removed.
15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with
a full specification wheel without delay.
Tyre repair kit 3
Minor damage to the tyre tread or side
wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be
repaired using the tyre repair kit.
Do not remove the foreign body from the
tyre.
Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on
the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre
repair kit.
9 Warning
Driving with inadequate tyre pressure or
a flat tyre can lead to hidden tyre
damage, which cannot be eliminated by
using the tyre repair kit. Part the vehicle
and consult a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Important information – see page 246.
In the event of a flat tyre:
z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply
hand brake, automatic transmission 3 selector lever in P, manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse
gear.
z Correctly set up the warning triangle.
Warning triangle – see page 234.
Self-help
Picture no: 17250t.tif
The tyre repair kit is in a compartment in
the spare wheel well of the luggage
compartment.
1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit
from the compartment. Carefully remove
the components from the pouch.
2. Remove the compressor.
Picture no: 17251t.tif
3. Remove the electrical connection cable
and air hose from the stowage
compartments on the underside of the
compressor.
243
Picture no: 17252t.tif
4. Screw the compressor air hose to the
connection on the sealant bottle.
5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on
the compressor.
Set the compressor near the tyre in such
a way that the sealant bottle is upright.
6. Remove the valve cap from the defective
tyre.
244
Self-help
Picture no: 17253t.tif
Picture no: 17254t.tif
7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.
10. Switch on ignition.
8. The switch on the compressor must be
set to §.
11. Set the rocker switch on the
compressor to I. The tyre is filled with
sealant.
9. Connect the compressor plug to the
accessory socket or cigarette lighter
socket. Accessory socket – see page 101.
12. While the sealant bottle drains (approx.
30 seconds) the pressure indicator on
the compressor briefly points to 6 bar.
Pressure then sinks again.
13. All of the sealant is pumped into the
tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with
air.
14. The prescribed tyre pressure – see
page 299 should be reached within
10 minutes. Switch off the compressor
when the correct pressure is obtained.
Picture no: 17255t.tif
If the prescribed tyre pressure is not
reached within 10 minutes, detach the
tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle one tyre
revolution (approx. 2 metres) in or
against the flow of traffic. Reconnect
the tyre repair kit and continue the
filling procedure for 10 minutes. If the
prescribed tyre pressure is still not
reached, the tyre is too badly
damaged. Park the vehicle and consult
a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Self-help
Drain excess tyre pressure with the
button over the pressure indicator.
Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes, see "Important
information" on page 246.
15. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the
filler hose to the free connection on the
sealant bottle. This prevents sealant
leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the
luggage compartment.
16. Wipe away any sealant spill with a
cloth.
17. Dismantle the warning triangle and
stow it in the luggage compartment –
see page 234.
245
18. The enclosed sticker shows the
maximum permitted speed at which the
tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in
the driver’s field of vision.
19. Continue driving immediately to allow
the sealant to distribute evenly
throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.
6 miles / 10 km (no more than 10
minutes) and check tyre pressure. Screw
the compressor air hose directly onto
the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).
Picture no: 17256t.tif
If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar,
adjust to the prescribed value. Repeat
the procedure until there is no more
pressure loss.
If tyre pressure is below 1.3, the vehicle
must not be driven. Consult a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
20. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage
compartment – see page 242.
246
Self-help
Important
9 Warning
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Do not use the temporary spare wheel for
a lengthy period.
Steerability and driving behaviour may
be impaired.
Replace repaired tyres as soon as
possible.
The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is
severely affected, therefore have this tyre
replaced.
If the compressor makes abnormal noises
or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least
30 minutes.
The integrated safety valve opens at a
pressure of 7 bar.
Protect the compressor from moisture and
rain.
The sealant can only be stored for approx.
4 years. After this time, the sealing
properties can no longer be guaranteed.
Heed the expiration date on the sealant
bottle.
The sealant bottle can only be used once.
Replace a used sealant bottle.
The compressor and sealant can be used
from approx. -30 °C.
Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in
accordance with applicable legislation.
An adapter for filling air mattresses, inner
tubes, etc. is located on the underside of
the compressor. Remove by unscrewing the
compressor air hose and pulling out the
adapter.
Electrical system
9 Warning
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Fuses
There are three fuse boxes in the vehicle: in
the passenger compartment on the far left
of the dashboard, in the luggage
compartment on the left in the stowage
compartment, and in the engine
compartment front left.
Self-help
Picture no: 17747j.tif
It is advisable to carry a full set of fuses –
available from any Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Spare fuses are kept on back of fuse box
cover at instrument panel. For opening
cover – see next page.
Picture no: 17748j.tif
Before replacing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch and the ignition.
A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be
recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse
should only be installed after the cause of
the fault has been rectified.
There is fuse extractor on the rear of the
fuse box cover on the instrument panel for
changing fuses – see figure above.
Picture no: 17259t.tif
247
Only fit fuses of the specified current
rating. Each fuse has its current rating
written on it, in addition the ratings are
colour coded.
Fuse
colour
Brownish yellow
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Transparent
Green
Orange
Dark blue
Fuse
rating
5A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
25 A
30 A
40 A
60 A
248
Self-help
No. Circuit
Picture no: 17749j.tif
Picture no: 17750j.tif
Fuses and the most important
circuits they protect
Some circuits may be protected by several
fuses.
Fuse box in passenger compartment
The fuse box is on the left, on the outside of
the instrument panel. Open door.
Disengage cover by pulling firmly and
remove.
No. Circuit
Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246.
1 Infotainment system
2 Interior fan,
heating, air conditioning
system
3 Sun roof
4 –
5 Door module control unit
6 Brake light
7 Bodywork module control
unit
8 Control unit front
passenger door module
9 Central control unit
Rating
20 A
7.5 A
20 A
–
7.5 A
7.5 A
30 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 Control unit
Steering column module
11 Diagnostics plug
12 Battery overload protection
13 –
14 –
15 Door module
control unit
16 –
17 Instruments,
information display
18 Ignition terminal 15
Air conditioning
19 –
20 Yaw rate sensor (ESP®Plus )
21 Infotainment system
22 Cigarette lighter
23 Interior fan,
air conditioning,
climate control system
24 –
25 Heating,
air conditioning system
26 Instruments,
information display
27 –
Rating
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
–
–
30 A
–
15 A
7.5 A
–
7.5 A
7.5 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
–
7.5 A
7.5 A
–
Self-help
No. Circuit
11
12
13
14
15
Picture no: 17610j.tif
Fuse box in luggage compartment
The fuse box is located on the left side of
the luggage compartment, in the stowage
compartment.
Saloon / hatch: press the latch down and
open the cover.
Estate: press both latches down and open
the cover and interior trim.
Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246.
16
17
18
Picture no: 17751j.tif
Some circuits may be protected by several
fuses.
No. Circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
–
–
Electric seat adjustment
Heated rear window
Electric seat adjustment
Electric window operation,
right rear
Electric window operation,
left rear
Seat heating, rear right
Horn,
Vauxhall alarm system
Fuel pump
Rating
–
–
40 A
40 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
15 A
15 A
20 A
28
29
Battery voltage
Seat heating, rear left
Towing equipment
Tailgate wiper
Heated seats, seat climate
control, left front
Seat heating, front right
Accessory socket
Tailgate locking,
estate
Terminal 30
Fuel filler cap locking
Ultrasonic sensor,
Vauxhall alarm system
Electrically operated
tailgate
Glass breakage sensor
(Vauxhall alarm system)
Battery voltage
Electronic chassis
Terminal 15 (ignition lock)
Seat occupancy
recognition,
tyre pressure monitoring
system
Rain sensor,
air conditioning system
Parking distance sensor
–
249
Rating
25 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
30 A
10 A
7.5 A
5A
30 A
7.5 A
25 A
10 A
25 A
5A
7.5 A
–
250
Self-help
Some circuits may be protected by several
fuses.
No. Circuit
Picture no: \17731j.tif
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is in the box at the front left
side of the engine compartment.
9 Warning
Switch off engine before opening the fuse
box in the engine compartment, risk of
injury.
To open, disengage front battery cover
and tilt upwards.
Picture no: 17752j.tif
Disengage the bar at the front of the cover
of fuse box and swing it upwards.
Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246.
1 Engine electronics,
transmission electronics
2 Starter
3 Horn
4 Air conditioning system,
climate control system
5 Windscreen wash system
6 –
Rating
20 A
25 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
–
Self-help
No. Circuit
Picture no: 17753j.tif
No. Circuit
7 Central control unit,
ESP®Plus
8 Headlights,
windscreen washing nozzles
9 Power steering
10 Adaptive Forward Lighting
11 Windscreen wiper
12 Central control unit,
ESP®Plus
13 Headlight wash system
14 Oxygen sensor
15 Engine control unit1)
16 ABS
1)
Rating
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
30 A
10 A
10 A
5A
The brake lights are on all the time if the
fuse is defective and the ignition is
switched on.
No. Circuit
Picture no:
17 –
18 –
19 Adaptive Forward
Lighting,
headlight range
adjustment,
xenon headlight system
20 Headlight range
adjustment
21 –
22 Windscreen wiper
23 Auxiliary heating
24 Battery voltage,
terminal 30
25 Battery voltage,
terminal 30
26 –
27 Easytronic
28 Tailgate module control
unit
29 ABS
30 Tailgate module control
unit
31 Vehicle interior module
control unit
32 ABS
33 Vehicle interior module
control unit
34 Tailgate module control
unit
35 Cooling fa1)
Rating
–
–
15 A
5A
15 A
251
Rating
30 A
60 A
40 A
60 A
60 A
40 A
60 A
60 A
30 A
40 A
20 A
36 Cooling fa1)
30 A
37 Adaptive Forward Lighting any
(AFL): Slot for changing to maxisymmetrical dipped beam fuse
for driving abroad, see
page 135
38 –
–
5A
–
30 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
–
1)
Depending on engine.
252
Self-help
Bulb replacement
Headlight aiming
We recommend that headlight aiming be
carried out by your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will have special equipment.
Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off
and switch relevant switch off.
Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch
the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass evaporate.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadvertently stained bulbs may be
cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
Replacement bulb must be in accordance
with data on base of defective bulb. Do not
exceed wattage given on bulb base.
When adjusting headlights, headlight
range adjustment must be set to 0.
Picture no: 17754j.tif
To change the lights on the left-hand side,
remove filler neck from windscreen wash
system bottle to gain better access:
disengage retaining clamp and withdraw
filler neck by pulling upwards. Wash fluid
may escape if the bottle is full.
9 Warning
Protect the environment. Do not allow
wash fluid to seep into the ground or
drain into the sewage system.
As the headlight must be removed, entrust
bulb replacement on the right side to a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Self-help
Picture no: 17755j.tif
Picture no: 17756j.tif
Halogen headlight system dipped
and main beam
Dipped beam
Headlights with separate systems for main
beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped
beam 2 (outer bulbs).
2. To replace the bulb on the left side,
remove the filler neck of the screen wash
bottle – see page 252. As the headlight
must be removed, entrust bulb
replacement on the right side to a
workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
1. Open bonnet.
3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise
and remove.
253
Picture no: 17757j.tif
4. Push down bulb at bulb holder.
6
254
Self-help
Picture no: 17758j.tif
5. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from
the reflector.
Picture no: 17270t.tif
Picture no: 17759j.tif
6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting.
Main beam
7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting,
without touching the glass.
1. Open bonnet.
8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
the bulb mounting engage in the
recesses in the reflector.
9. Engage the bulb holder.
10. Reposition the headlight cover and turn
it clockwise.
11. After changing bulbs on the left-hand
side, refit the filler neck of the headlight
wash bottle and click it home.
2. To replace the bulb on the left side,
remove the filler neck of the screen wash
bottle – see page 252. As the headlight
must be removed, entrust bulb
replacement on the right side to a
workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise
and remove.
4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
Self-help
Picture no: 17760j.tif
5. Press spring wire clip forward, disengage
to the right and open.
Picture no: 17761j.tif
6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the
lugs in the recesses on the reflector
without touching the glass.
8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector
onto bulb.
255
Picture no: 17764j.tif
Xenon headlight system,
dipped and main beam
Headlights with separate systems for main
beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped
beam 2 (outer bulbs).
Dipped beam
9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn
it clockwise.
9 Warning
10. After changing bulbs on the left-hand
side, refit the filler neck of the headlight
wash bottle and click it home.
The dipped beam operates at very high
voltage. Do not touch; high voltage can
be fatal. Have bulbs changed by a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
6
256
Self-help
Picture no: 17759j.tif
Main beam
1. Open bonnet.
2. To replace the bulb on the left side,
remove the filler neck of the screen wash
bottle – see page 252. As the headlight
must be removed, entrust bulb
replacement on the right side to a
workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise
and remove.
4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
Picture no: 17760j.tif
5. Press spring wire clip forward, disengage
to the right and open.
Picture no: 17761j.tif
6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the
lugs in the recesses on the reflector
without touching the glass.
8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector
onto bulb.
9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn
it clockwise.
10. After changing bulbs on the left-hand
side, refit the filler neck of the headlight
wash bottle and click it home.
Self-help
257
Adaptive Forward Lighting
System 3
Xenon headlight system for main and
dipped beam together with curve
illumination based on steering angle.
9 Warning
Xenon headlights operate at extremely
high electrical voltage. Do not touch.
Danger to life. The bulbs for dipped
beam, main beam, turn lighting, parking
lights and turn signals should only be
replaced by a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17759j.tif
Halogen headlight system,
Xenon headlight system,
Parking lights
1. Open bonnet.
2. To replace the bulb on the left side,
remove the filler neck of the screen wash
bottle – see page 252. As the headlight
must be removed, entrust bulb
replacement on the right side to a
workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise
and remove.
Picture no: 17762j.tif
4. Remove parking light bulb holder from
reflector.
6
258
Self-help
Halogen headlight system,
Xenon headlight system,
Front indicator lights
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Side turn signal lights
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Picture no: 17763j.tif
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert socket in reflector, position
headlight cover and turn clockwise.
8. After changing bulbs on the left-hand
side, refit the filler neck of the headlight
wash bottle and click it home.
Fog lights 3
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Picture no: 17610j.tif
Tail lights
Saloon / hatch
1. To open the stowage compartment,
press down bar and open the cover.
Self-help
259
4. Remove bulb from socket.
5. Insert new bulb without touching the
glass. Fit bulb mounting into bulb
housing. Connect plug. Close stowage
compartment.
Picture no: 17767j.tif
2. Detach plug connector from bulb
mounting.
3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer
edges of bulb mounting towards each
other and remove bulb mounting.
Bulbs from top to bottom:
Turn signal light
Tail light/brake light
Tail light
Fog tail light
Reversing light
Picture no: 17768j.tif
Estate
1. Open the compartment on the left or
right-hand side by pressing the latch
down – see page 235.
2. Hold the bulb housing from the outside,
use a wheel bolt spanner 3 to loosen the
retaining nuts and unscrew them by
hand. Remove the bulb housing to the
rear. Wheel bolt spanner 3 – see vehicle
tools, page 238.
3. Detach the cable from the bulb housing.
6
260
Self-help
Picture no: 17769j.tif
4. Undo the three screws using a
screwdriver and detach the bulb
mounting.
Picture no: 17770j.tif
5. Remove the bulb from the socket. Bulbs
in bulb mounting:
1 = Brake/tail light
2 = Turn signal light
6. Fit a new bulb without touching the
glass. Refit the bulb mounting and screw
it into place. Position the light housing in
the vehicle body and screw it into place.
Close the compartment in the side trim.
Picture no: 17771j.tif
Tailgate lights
We recommend that you have bulbs
changed by a workshop because of the
effort involved. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
1. Use a screwdriver to prise off the plastic
plugs in the tailgate panelling to the
right and left of the tailgate lock.
Self-help
Picture no: 17772j.tif
2. Undo screws in handle of inner panelling
with torx screwdriver.
3. Remove the inner panelling and clips
from the tailgate.
Picture no: 17773j.tif
4. Unscrew the mounting in question:
1 = Tail light
2 = Fog tail light
3 = Reversing light
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Fit a new bulb without touching the
glass. Refit the mounting in the tailgate.
7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate
using the clips. Tighten the screw in the
handle. Refit the plastic plugs in the
openings.
Lights in electrically operated tailgate 3
Have bulbs replaced by a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
261
Picture no: 17297t.tif
Number plate light
1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert
as illustrated in figure. Press to the side
and release spring.
6
262
Self-help
Picture no: 17298t.tif
Picture no: 17299t.tif
2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking
care not to pull on the cable.
4. Rotate bulb holder to left and
disengage.
3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb
socket.
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert light holder in light housing and
engage by rotating clockwise.
8. Connect plug to bulb socket.
9. Insert and engage bulb housing.
Picture no: 17774j.tif
Courtesy light
Front courtesy light, reading lights 3
To ensure that no power is supplied to the
lights, close the doors before removing.
1. Lever the lens out of the housing
recesses.
Self-help
Picture no: 17775j.tif
2. Remove bulb from socket.
3. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
4. Mount lens and engage in position.
Rear courtesy lights 3,
rear reading lights 3
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Picture no: 17301t.tif
Glove compartment lighting,
luggage compartment lighting,
foot well lighting 3
To ensure that no power is supplied to the
lights, close the doors or hold the contact
switch depressed before removing.
1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver.
263
Picture no: 17302t.tif
2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip
and remove.
3. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
4. Insert light in opening and engage in
position.
Instrument illumination,
Information display illumination 3
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
264
If you have a problem
If you have a problem
In our experience, the most common cause
of all complaints is the result of
misunderstanding or lack of
communication between the customer and
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
We sincerely hope you will never have
cause to complain about your vehicle.
However, if things do go wrong, the best
course of action for you to take is to
contact your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and
explain the difficulty you are having. We
are confident they will do their utmost to
resolve the problem to your complete
satisfaction.
Sometimes, however, despite the best of
intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your
problem has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, please make an appointment
to discuss the matter with the Manager of
the department concerned.
The majority of areas of concern can be
quickly resolved in this way.
Should you wish to pursue the matter
further, the Principal of the Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer should be made
aware of your concern. It is advisable in
cases such as this to write to him to confirm
your problem and the solutions that have
been offered.
You can be assured the Authorised
Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious
to fully investigate your problems and
correct any errors made. After all, he has a
large investment in his business and is
proud of his reputation and
professionalism and fully realises that
satisfied customers are his key to success.
In the unlikely event that you are still not
happy with the answer your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer has given, or the
action he proposes to correct the problem,
you may contact the Customer Care
Department1) where a team of Customer
Care Consultants will spare no effort to
ensure your complete satisfaction.
Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
Customer Care,
Griffin House,
Osborne Road,
LUTON,
Beds., LU1 3YT
Telephone: 0845 090 2044
They will review all the facts involved. Then
if it is felt some further action can be taken,
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be
advised accordingly. In any case, your
contact will be acknowledged confirming
Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter.
1)
Calls may be monitored and recorded for
training purposes.
If you are not satisfied with the outcome,
you can if you wish, seek advice from an
independent third party such as:
Automobile Association (A.A.)
Fanum House,
BASINGSTOKE,
Hants., RG21 2EA
Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.),
R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd.,
89-91 Pall Mall,
LONDON, SW1Y S45
The Customer Relations Department,
Society of Motor Manufacturers and
Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.),
Forbes House, Halkin Street,
LONDON, SW1X 7DS
Customer Complaints Service,
Scottish Motor Trade Association,
(S.M.T.A.),
3 Palmerston Place,
EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ
The National Conciliation Service,
Retail Motor Industry Federation,
9 North Street,
RUGBY, CV21 2AB
If you have a problem whilst abroad:
The Service Departments of Adam Opel
GmbH and General Motors branches
everywhere will provide information and
assistance:
In Luxembourg please contact
the General Motors Service Department in
Antwerp – Belgium
Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29
If you have a problem
General Motors Austria GmbH
Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59
1220 Vienna – Austria
Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or
00 43-1-2 88 77 0
General Motors Belgium N.V.
Noorderlaan 401 – Haven 500
2030 Antwerp – Belgium
Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29
General Motors Southeast Europe,
org. složka Olbrachtova 9
140 00 Prague – Czech Republic
Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321
General Motors Denmark
Jaegersborg Alle 4
2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark
Telephone 00 45-39 97 85 00
Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
Customer Care
Griffin House, Osborne Road
Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England
Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044
General Motors Finland Oy
Pajuniityntie 5
00320 Helsinki – Finland
Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47
General Motors France
1 – 9, avenue du Marais
Angle Quai de Bezons
95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France
Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51
ADAM OPEL GmbH
Bahnhofsplatz 1
65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany
Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or
00 49-61 42-7 70
General Motors Hellas S.A.
56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str.
Amarousion
151 25 Athens – Greece
Tel 00 30-1-6 80 65 01
General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.
Szabadsag utca 117
2040 Budaörs – Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
General Motors India
Sixth Floor, Tower A, Global Business Park
Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road
Gurgaon – 122 022, Haryana – India
Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333
General Motors Ireland Ltd.
Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road
Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland
Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00
General Motors Italia Srl
Piazzale dell’Industria 40
00144 Rome – Italy
Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51
General Motors Nederland B.V.
Lage Mosten 49 – 63
4822 NK Breda – Netherlands
Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00
General Motors Norge AS
Kjeller-Vest 6
2027 Kjeller – Norway
Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04
General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Domaniewska 41
06-672 Warsaw – Poland
Tel. 00 48- 22-606 17 00
General Motors Portugal
Quinta da Fonte
Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2
2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal
Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00
General Motors Southeast Europe,
org. zložka
Apollo Business Centre
Mlynské Nivy 45
821 09 Bratislava – Slovakia
Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543
General Motors España S.L.
Paseo de la Castellana, 91
28046 Madrid – Spain
Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25
General Motors Norden AB
Årstaängvägen 17
100 73 Stockholm – Sweden
Tel. 00 46-20 333 000
General Motors Suisse S.A.
Stelzenstraße 4
8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland
Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80
General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti.
Kemalpasa yolu üzeri
35861 Torbali/Izmir – Turkey
Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53
In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia, Latvia,
Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania,
Serbia-Montenegro and Slovenia
please contact the
General Motors Service Department in
Budaörs – Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
265
266
Maintenance, Inspection System
Maintenance,
Inspection System
The service interval display takes account
of off-the-road periods during which the
battery is disconnected.
For vehicles with flexible oil change and
service intervals, the length of these
intervals is based on several parameters
stemming from usage. For this reason,
various engine-specific data is continually
gathered and is used to calculate the
remaining distance until the next service.
Picture no: 17858j.tif
A note on safety ..................................
Checking and topping up fluids .........
Engine oil ..............................................
Diesel fuel filter ....................................
Coolant .................................................
Brake fluid ............................................
Windscreen wiper ................................
Windscreen and headlight wash
systems 3...........................................
Battery ..................................................
Protecting electronic components .....
Vehicle decommissioning....................
Vehicle recommissioning.....................
267
267
268
270
270
272
273
275
276
276
277
277
In order to guarantee economical and safe
vehicle operation and to maintain the
value of your vehicle, it is of vital
importance that all maintenance work is
carried out at the proper intervals as
specified by Vauxhall.
In vehicles with a fixed oil change and
service interval, InSP appears in the
odometer display when the ignition is
switched on and off. Have the service work
carried out within one week or 300 miles
(500 km). We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
The remaining distance can be seen in the
odometer display when the ignition is off:
Press the reset button next to the trip
odometer. InSP and the remaining distance
will be displayed.
If the remaining distance is less than
1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed
with a remaining distance of 600 miles
(1000 km) when the ignition is switched on.
InSP is displayed for several seconds if the
remaining distance is less than 300 miles
(500 km). Have the service work that is due
carried out within one week or 300 miles
(500 km). Have this work carried out by a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to
avoid invalidation of warranty claims.
Maintenance, Inspection System
267
Further information on maintenance and
the inspection system can be found in the
service booklet, which is in the glove
compartment.
Have maintenance work, as well as repairs
to the bodywork and equipment, carried
out by a professional. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is
familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in
possession of the necessary special tools
and the latest service instructions from
Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use
a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the
warranty period to avoid invalidation of
warranty claims. See the Service Booklet for
further information.
Separate anti-corrosion service
Have the work carried out at the intervals
specified in the Service Booklet. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Picture no: 17304t.tif
A note on safety
Always switch ignition off when performing
checks in the engine compartment (e. g.
checking the brake fluid level or the engine
oil level) because of risk of injury from live
cables and rotating parts.
9 Warning
The cooling fan is controlled by a
thermoswitch and can therefore start
unexpectedly even if the ignition is
switched off. Risk of injury.
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Picture no: 17776j.tif
Never carry out any repairs or adjustment
and maintenance work on the vehicle
yourself. This especially applies to the
engine, chassis and safety parts. You may
unwittingly infringe the provisions of the
law and, by not performing the work
properly, endanger yourself and other
road users.
Checking and topping up fluids
To aid identification, the caps used when
topping up engine oil, coolant and wash
fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured
yellow.
268
Maintenance, Inspection System
Picture no: 17777j.tif
Engine oil
Information on engine oils is found in the
Service Booklet.
Engine oil level and consumption
Every engine consumes engine oil for
technical reasons. The engine oil
consumption cannot be assessed until a
fairly long distance has been driven, and
may be above the specified value when the
vehicle is first being driven (run-in period).
Frequent driving at high revs increases
engine oil consumption.
Picture no: 17778j.tif
In vehicles with engine oil level
monitoring 3, the engine oil level is
monitored automatically, see page 38. It is
advisable to check the oil level before
setting out on long journeys.
9 Warning
It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the proper level of an appropriate quality
oil in the engine.
Picture no: 17779j.tif
Checking the engine oil level,
topping up engine oil
The figures on this page show examples of
the checks for various petrol and diesel
engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next page
shows the checks for engine Z 30 DT1).
The oil level must be checked with the
vehicle on a level surface and with the
engine (which must be at operating
temperature) switched off. Wait at least
5 minutes before checking the level to
allow the normal engine oil accumulation
in the engine to drain into the oil pan.
1)
Sales designation – see page 285.
Maintenance, Inspection System
Picture no: 17780j.tif
Picture no: 17781j.tif
To check the engine oil level, insert wiped
oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go.
Top engine oil up if the level has dropped
into the range of the top-up mark MIN.
Top up with the same brand of engine oil
that was used during the previous oil
change, following the instructions in the
service booklet.
The engine oil level must not exceed the
upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess
engine oil must be drained off or extracted.
If the engine oil level is above the MAX
mark there is a risk of damage to the
engine or the catalytic converter.
To close, position the cap and screw it into
place.
The amount filled must be between the
MIN and MAX marks – see page 308.
Capacities – see page 308.
269
Picture no: 17782j.tif
Engine oil change, oil filter change
Change the oil at the displayed service
intervals.
We recommend that you use genuine
Vauxhall engine oil filters.
9 Warning
We recommend that you entrust engine
oil and filter changes to a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with
legal requirements regarding disposal of
used oil and oil filters and can thus help
to protect both the environment and your
health.
270
Maintenance, Inspection System
Diesel fuel filter
Coolant
Check fuel filter for any water residue when
each engine oil change takes place. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
During operation the system is pressurised.
The temperature may therefore rise briefly
to over 100 °C.
For engines1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL and
Z 19 DTH, control indicator A illuminates
if there is water in the diesel fuel filter.
Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals
if the vehicle is subjected to extreme
operating conditions such as high humidity
(primarily in coastal areas), extremely high
or low outside temperatures and
substantially varying daytime and nighttime temperatures.
The glycol-based coolant provides
excellent corrosion protection for the
heating and cooling systems as well as
antifreeze protection down to –28 °C. It
remains in the cooling system throughout
the year and need not be changed.
Use of certain antifreezes can lead to
engine damage. We therefore recommend
that you use antifreezes that have been
approved by Vauxhall.
9 Warning
Antifreeze is a danger to health; it must
therefore be kept in the original container
and out of the reach of children.
Picture no: 17783j.tif
Antifreeze and corrosion protection
Before the start of the cold weather season,
have the coolant checked for correct
concentration. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The amount of antifreeze must provide
protection down to approx. –28 °C. If the
antifreeze concentration is too low, this
reduces protection from freezing and
corrosion. Top up antifreeze if necessary.
If coolant loss is topped up with water,
have concentration checked and add
antifreeze if necessary.
1)
Sales designation – see page 284.
Maintenance, Inspection System
271
When the engine is at operating
temperature, coolant level rises. It falls
again when the system cools. If it falls
below the KALT/COLD mark when the
system is cold, top up to the mark.
Top up antifreeze. If no antifreeze is
available, top up with clean tap water. If
tap water is unavailable, distilled water
can be used.
Picture no: 17784j.tif
Coolant level
Hardly any losses occur since the cooling
system is sealed and it is thus rarely
necessary to top up the coolant.
4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When
the cooling system is cold, the coolant level
in the expansion tank should be slightly
above the KALT/COLD mark. Coolant level
can be read off from the outside of the
expansion tank.
Picture no: 17862j.tif
For V6 petrol and diesel engines, the
expansion tank must be opened in order to
check coolant level. When the cooling
system is cold, the coolant should be up to
the COLD mark on the filler opening.
9 Warning
Allow engine to cool down before
removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler
cap carefully so that pressure can escape
slowly, otherwise there is a risk of
scalding.
After topping up with drinking water or
distilled water, check anti-freeze
concentration and add anti-freeze if
necessary. Have cause of anti-freeze loss
remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
To close, position the cap and screw it into
place.
6
272
Maintenance, Inspection System
Coolant temperature
If the temperature gauge enters the righthand (warning) zone or control indicator W
illuminates, check the coolant level
immediately.
The use of certain brake fluids can cause
damage or loss of braking power. We
therefore recommend the use of highperformance brake fluid that has been
approved by Vauxhall if necessary.
z Coolant level low:
Top up coolant. Pay attention to the
instructions given under "Antifreeze and
corrosion protection" and "Coolant
level". Have the cause of coolant loss
remedied. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Extreme cleanliness is needed when
topping up, since contamination in the
brake fluid can cause brake system
malfunctions.
z Coolant level OK:
Have the cause of increased coolant
temperature remedied. Consult a
workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17786j.tif
Brake fluid
Brake fluid level
9 Warning
Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Do
not allow it to come into contact with
eyes, skin, fabric or painted surfaces.
Direct contact could cause injury and
damage.
The fluid level in the reservoir must be
neither higher than the MAX mark nor
lower than the MIN mark.
After correcting the brake fluid level, have
the cause of brake fluid loss remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Maintenance, Inspection System
Brake fluid change
Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs
water. If the brakes become hot, such as
when driving on long downhill stretches,
vapour bubbles can occur in the water,
which can have an extremely adverse
effect on braking power (depending on the
proportion of water).
Windscreen wiper
The fluid change intervals specified in the
Service Booklet must therefore be
observed.
If the windscreen is dirty, operate the
windscreen wash system before switching
on the windscreen wiper or setting the
wiper to automatic operation with the rain
sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear.
9 Warning
We recommend that you have brake fluid
changed by a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will be familiar with the
requirements of the law as regards
disposal of brake fluid and can thus help
to protect the environment and your
health.
Clear vision is essential for safe driving.
Perform regular checks on the windscreen
wiper and headlight wash systems 3 to
ensure they are operating correctly. We
recommend wiper blade replacement at
least once a year.
Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or
set them to automatic operation with the
rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as
this could damage the wiper blades or the
wiper system.
273
If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass,
we recommend that they be released with
the aid of Vauxhall De-icer Spray.
Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with
a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen
Wash Solvent.
Wiper blades whose lips have become
hardened, cracked or covered with silicone
must be replaced. This may be necessary
as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt
or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning
agents.
Switch off the windscreen wiper or
automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car
washes, see pages 17, 279.
Windscreen wiper blade maintenance, see
page 280.
6
274
Maintenance, Inspection System
Picture no: 17315t.tif
To ensure proper operation of the rain
sensor 3, the sensor area must be free from
dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen wash
system must also be operated at regular
intervals and the sensor area must be deiced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 can be
identified by the sensor area near the top
of the windscreen.
Picture no: 17787j.tif
Service setting for front windscreen wiper
(e.g. for changing or cleaning the front
wiper blades).
Within 8 seconds of switching off the
engine but with the key in the ignition
switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk
downward. Release the stalk as soon as the
wiper blades are vertical.
Picture no: 17788j.tif
Wiper blades on the windscreen
Activating service position, see preceding
column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release
lever and detach the wiper blade.
Maintenance, Inspection System
Fill only with clean water to prevent the
nozzles from clogging. To improve
cleaning efficiency, we recommend that
you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash
Solvent.
The windscreen wash system and
headlight wash system will not freeze in
winter:
Frost protection
down to
– 5 °C
– 10 °C
– 20 °C
– 30 °C
Picture no: 17789j.tif
Windscreen and headlight wash
systems 3
The filler neck of the windscreen washing
system and headlight washing system
bottle 3 is at the front left of the engine
compartment next to the battery. The fluid
level in the reservoir can be read off from
the level indicator. Do not fill above 1/1.
Capacities – see page 308.
275
Mixture
Vauxhall
Windscreen Wash
Solvent: Water
1: 3
1: 2
1: 1
2: 1
When closing the reservoir, press the lid
firmly over the beaded edge all the way
round.
276
Maintenance, Inspection System
Laying up the vehicle for more than 4
weeks can lead to battery discharge, which
may reduce the service life of the battery.
Disconnect battery from on-board power
supply by detaching negative terminal
(Vauxhall alarm system 3 is then
disabled).
Protecting electronic components
Ensure that ignition is switched off before
connecting battery. Then perform the
following actions:
To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not
make any modifications to the electrical
system, e.g. connecting additional
consumers or tampering with electronic
control units (chip tuning).
z Setting date and time in the information
display – see pages 44, 47, 52.
Battery
Picture no: 17320t.tif
The battery is maintenance-free.
9 Warning
We recommend that you have battery
changes carried out by a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. They know the laws
concerning the disposal of used batteries
and therefore protects the environment
and your health.
Retrofitted electrical or electronic
accessories can place an additional load
on the battery or even discharge the
battery. We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding
technical possibilities, such as fitting a
more powerful battery.
z Activate window and sun roof
electronics 3 if necessary – see
pages 138, 141.
In order to prevent the battery from
discharging, some consumers such as the
courtesy light automatically switch off
after approx. 20 minutes.
In order to prevent faults in electronic
components in the electrical system, never
connect or disconnect battery with engine
running or ignition switched on. Never start
engine with battery disconnected, e.g.
when starting using jump leads.
9 Warning
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Disconnecting/connecting vehicle battery
from/to electrical system
Disconnect the battery from the vehicle
electrical system before charging: First
detach the negative and then the positive
lead. Do not reverse the polarity of the
battery, i.e. do not confuse the terminals
for the positive and negative leads. When
connecting, start with the positive lead and
then connect the negative lead.
Maintenance, Inspection System
Vehicle decommissioning
Observe national regulations.
If the vehicle is decommissioned for several
months, the following work must be carried
out in order to prevent damage. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see
page 279.
z Check corrosion protection in engine
compartment and on underbody and
repair if necessary.
z Clean and preserve rubber seals on
bonnet and doors.
z Change engine oil see page 269.
z Check antifreeze and corrosion
protection – see page 270.
z Check the coolant level, top up with
antifreeze if necessary – see page 271.
z Empty windscreen wash system and
headlight wash system.
z Increase tyre pressure to value specified
for full load, see page 299.
Vehicle storage
z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place.
With manual transmission or
Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse
gear. With automatic transmission 3,
selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like
to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
277
Vehicle recommissioning
Observe national regulations.
Perform the following work before
recommissioning the vehicle:
z Connect battery – see page 276.
z Do not apply hand brake.
z Check tyre pressure and correct if
necessary – see page 299.
z Disconnect battery by disengaging
negative terminal from vehicle electrical
system – see page 276.
z Fill up windscreen wash system
– see page 275.
z Check engine oil level – see page 268.
z Check the coolant level; top up with
antifreeze if necessary – see page 271.
z Fit the number plate if necessary.
278
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer
with regard to care aids tested and
recommended by Vauxhall.
When caring for your vehicle, observe all
national environmental regulations,
particularly when washing it.
Vehicle care aids 3..............................
Washing ...............................................
Waxing .................................................
Polishing ...............................................
Wheels ..................................................
Paintwork damage ..............................
..............................................................
Exterior lights .......................................
Plastic and rubber parts .....................
Wheels and tyres .................................
Interior and upholstery........................
Seat belts..............................................
Windows ...............................................
Windscreen wiper blades ....................
Locks.....................................................
Engine compartment...........................
Underbody ...........................................
278
279
279
279
279
280
280
280
280
280
280
280
280
281
281
281
281
Regular, thorough care helps to improve
the appearance of your vehicle and
maintain its value over the years. It is also
prerequisite for warranty claims for any
paint or corrosion damage. The following
pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if
used properly, will help combat the
unavoidable damaging effects of the
environment.
Vehicle care aids 3
Vehicle wash:
z Wash brush
z Shampoo
z Sponge
z Insect Removal Sponge
z Chamois
Vehicle care:
z Paintwork Cleaner
z Paintwork Polish
z Cream Polish
z Metallic Paintwork Wax
z Hard wax
z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint
z Vauxhall Touch-Up/Aerosol Paint
z Wheel Preserver
z Insect Remover
z Window Cleaner
z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent
z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals
z Cleaner
Vehicle care
Washing
The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to
environmental influences, e.g. continuous
changes in weather conditions, industrial
waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so
wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When
using automatic car washes, select a
programme which includes waxing.
Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen
and the like should be cleaned off
immediately, as they contain aggressive
constituents which can cause paint
damage.
Please follow the wash system
manufacturer’s instructions when using
wash systems. The windscreen wiper and
the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and
the rear window wiper 3 must be switched
off – see page 16. Unscrew the antenna
rod 3 and the roof rack 3, standing on the
door sill to make them easier to reach.
If you wash your vehicle by hand, make
sure that the insides of the wings are also
thoroughly rinsed out.
Clean edges and folds on opened doors
and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the
vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use
separate leathers for paint and window
surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows
will impair vision.
Observe national regulations.
Waxing
Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular
after it has been washed using shampoo
and at the latest when water no longer
forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise
the paintwork will dry out.
Also wax edges and folds on opened doors
and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
279
Polishing
Polishing is necessary only if the paint has
become dull or if solid deposits have
become attached to it.
Paintwork polish with silicone forms a
protective film, making waxing
unnecessary.
Plastic body parts should not be treated
with wax and polish.
Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles
with a metallic-effect paint finish.
Wheels
Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to
clean the wheels.
Wheels are painted and can be treated
with the same agents as the body. For alloy
wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel
Preserver.
280
Vehicle care
Paintwork damage
Plastic and rubber parts
Seat belts
Repair small areas of paint damage such
as stone impacts, scratches etc.
immediately using a Vauxhall touch-up
applicator or Vauxhall spray and touch-up
paint before rust can form. If rust has
already formed, have the cause remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also
pay attention to surfaces and edges
beneath the vehicle where which rust may
have formed unnoticed for some time.
For additional cleaning of plastic and
rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any
other agent, and in particular do not use
solvents or petrol.
Always keep seat belts clean and dry.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
When cleaning the heated rear window,
make sure that the heating element on the
inside of the window is not damaged.
Exterior lights
Headlight and other protective light bezels
are made of plastic. If they require
additional cleaning after the vehicle has
been washed, clean them with Car
Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or
caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,
and do not clean them dry.
Wheels and tyres
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
Interior and upholstery
Clean the vehicle interior, including the
instrument panel fascia, using interior
cleaner.
The instrument panel should only be
cleaned using a soft damp cloth.
Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum
cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use
cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and
vinyl.
Do not use cleaning agents such as
acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint
remover, nail varnish remover, washing
powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.
Open velcro fasteners on clothing could
damage seat upholstery. Make sure that
velcro fasteners are closed.
Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner.
Windows
Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather
in conjunction with Window Cleaner and
Insect Remover.
Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is
suitable for de-icing windows.
For mechanical removal of ice, use a
commercially available sharp-edged ice
scraper. Press the scraper firmly against
the glass so that no dirt can get under it
and scratch the glass.
Vehicle care
Windscreen wiper blades
Wax, such as that used in car washes, can
cause streaks to form on the windscreen
when the wiper are used.
Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with
a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen
Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary –
see page 273.
Locks
The locks are lubricated with a high-grade
lock cylinder grease at the factory.
Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the
locks from freezing up. Only use de-icing
agent in emergencies, as they have a
degreasing effect and will impair the
function of the locks. After using a de-icing
agent, have the locks re-greased. We
recommend that you entrust this to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Engine compartment
Areas of the engine compartment that are
painted in the same colour as the vehicle
must be looked after like any other painted
surface.
It is advisable to wash the engine
compartment before and after winter and
preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and
brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets
before washing the engine.
When washing the engine with a steam jet,
do not direct the jet at components of the
anti-lock brake system, the air conditioning
system, the climate control system, the
auxiliary heater or the belt drive or its
components.
Protective wax that has been applied is
also removed during the engine wash. For
this reason, have the engine, brake system
components in the engine compartment,
axle components with steering, body parts
and cavities thoroughly preserved with
protective wax after the wash. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
An engine wash can be performed in the
spring in order to remove dirt that has
adhered to the engine compartment,
which may also have a high salt content.
Check protective wax layer and make good
if necessary.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
Underbody
Your vehicle has a factory-applied PVC
undercoating in the wheel arches
(including the longitudinal members) which
provides permanent protection and needs
no special maintenance.
281
The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not
covered by PVC are provided a durable
protective wax coating in critical areas.
On vehicles which are washed frequently in
automatic car washes with underbody
washing facility, the protective wax
coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving
additives, so check the underbody after
washing and have it waxed if necessary.
Before the start of the cold weather season,
check the PVC coating and protective wax
coating and, if necessary, have them
restored to perfect condition.
Caution - commercially available bitumen/
rubber materials can damage the PVC
coating. We recommend that you have
underbody work carried out by a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who knows the
prescribed materials and has experience in
the use thereof.
The underbody should be washed
following the end of the cold weather
season to remove any dirt adhering to the
underbody since this may also contain salt.
Check protective wax coating and, if
necessary, have it restored to perfect
condition.
282
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle documents, identification
plate ...................................................
Vehicle identification data..................
Coolant, brake fluid, oils .....................
Engine data..........................................
Performance.........................................
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions ......
Weights, payload and roof load ........
Tyres .....................................................
Electrical system ..................................
Capacities ............................................
Dimensions ...........................................
Installation dimensions of trailer
towing equipment.............................
Picture no: 17321t.tif
282
283
283
284
286
288
293
299
307
308
310
311
Vehicle documents, identification
plate
The technical data is determined in
accordance with European Community
standards. We reserve the right to make
modifications. Specifications in the vehicle
documents always have priority over those
given in this manual.
The identification plate is affixed to the
front right door frame.
Picture no: 17322t.tif
Information on identification plate:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Manufacturer
Type approval number
Vehicle identification number
Permissible gross vehicle weight
Permissible gross train weight
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle-specific or
country-specific data
Technical Data
In other design variants, the identification
plate may also be affixed to the
dashboard.
Engine code and engine number: stamped
on left-hand side of engine on crankcase.
283
Coolant, brake fluid, oils
When topping up
– coolant,
– brake fluid,
– manual transmission oil,
– automatic transmission oil,
– power steering oil
we recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can
advise you on the correct products to use.
Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious
damage to the vehicle.
Picture no: 17323t.tif
Vehicle identification data
The vehicle identification number is
stamped on the identification plate (see
previous page) and in the vehicle floor on
the right-hand side under a cover between
the driver’s door and seat.
Engine oils
Information on engine oils is found in the
Service Booklet.
284
Technical Data
Engine data
Sales designation
Engine identifier code
1.8
Z 18 XE
1.8
Z 18 XER
2.0 Turbo
Z 20 NET
2.2
Z 22 SE
2.2 DIRECT
Z 22 YH
2.8 V6
Z 28 NEL
4
4
4
4
4
6
Piston displacement (cm )
1796
1796
1998
2198
2198
2792
Brake horse power (kW/bhp)
at rpm
90
6000
103
6300
129
5500
108
5600
114
5600
169
5500
Torque (Nm)
at rpm
167
3800
175
3800
265
2500 to 3800
203
4000
220
3800
330
1800 to 4500
Petrol
Petrol
Petrol
Petrol
Petrol
Petrol
Octane requirement (RON)
unleaded
or unleaded
or unleaded
95
982)
912)3)
95
982)
912)3)
95
982)
912)4)
95
982)
912)4)
955)
982)
–6)
95
982)
912)3)
Max. permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm)
approx.
6500
6500
6200
6500
6500
6700
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
Number of cylinders
3
Type of fuel
1)
Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 91 RON is used.
If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with
a caravan/trailer load or high payload.
The use of fuel that is at least 95 RON is prescribed.
91 octane fuel must not be used.
Technical Data
Engine data
Sales designation
Engine identifier code
2.8 V6
Z 28 NET
VXR
Z 28 NET
1.9 CDTI
Z 19 DTL
1.9 CDTI
Z 19 DT
1.9 CDTI
Z 19 DTH
3.0 CDTI
Z 30 DT
6
6
4
4
4
6
Piston displacement (cm )
2792
2792
1910
1910
1910
2958
Brake horse power (kW/bhp)
at rpm
184
5500
206
5500
74
3500
88
3500 to 4000
110
4000
135
4000
Torque (Nm)
at rpm
350
1800 to 4500
355
1800 to 4500
260
280
1700 to 2500 2000 to 2750
320
2000 to 2750
400
1900 to 2700
Petrol
Petrol
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Octane requirement (RON)
unleaded
or unleaded
or unleaded
Cetane requirement (CN)1)
95
982)
912)3)
–
954)
982)
–5)
–
–
–
–
49 (D)6)
–
–
–
49 (D)4)
–
–
–
49 (D)4)
–
–
–
49 (D)4)
Max. permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm)
approx.
6700
6700
5100
5100
5100
5000
Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km)
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
Number of cylinders
3
Type of fuel
1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 91 RON is used.
Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 95 RON is used.
91 octane fuel must not be used.
A lower value is possible with winter fuels.
285
286
Technical Data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), Saloon / hatch
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 SE
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Sports transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
126/203
127/205
–
–
130/210
130/210
129/207
–
–
143/230
–
–
134/216
–
–
130/210
136/218
136/218
–
130/210
155/250
–
–
155/250
Engine1)
Z 28 NET
Z 28 NET VXR
Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
155/2503)
–
–
155/2503)
155/2503)
–
–
155/2503)
116/186
–
–
–
124/200
–
–
–
135/217
–
–
130/210
143/230
–
–
140/226
2)
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Sports transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
1)
2)
3)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
The maximum speed is limited electronically.
Technical Data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), estate
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL
Z 28 NET
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Sports transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
–
124/199
–
–
126/203
130/209
128/207
–
–
139/224
–
–
130/210
130/210
–
129/208
152/245
–
–
152/245
155/2503)
–
–
155/2503)
Engine1)
Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
155/2503)
–
–
155/2503)
121/195
–
–
–
130/210
–
–
129/208
140/225
–
–
137/221
2)
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Sports transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
1)
2)
3)
113/182
–
–
–
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
The maximum speed is limited electronically.
287
288
Technical Data
Fuel consumption,
CO2 emissions
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed by
1999/100/EC) has applied for the
measurement of fuel consumption since
1996.
The directive is oriented to actual driving
practices: Urban driving is rated at approx.
/3 and extra urban driving with
approx. 2/3 (urban and extra-urban
consumption). Cold starts and acceleration
phases are also taken into consideration.
1
The specification of CO2 emission is also a
constituent of the directive.
The figures given must not be taken as a
guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
of a particular vehicle.
All values are based on the EU base model
with standard equipment.
The calculation of fuel consumption as
specified by directive 1999/100/EC takes
account of the vehicle’s kerb weight,
ascertained in accordance with these
regulations. Optional extras may result in
slightly higher fuel consumption and CO2
emission levels than those quoted.
To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282
by the number of litres/ 100 km
Saving fuel, protecting the environment
– see page 188.
Technical Data
289
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
Z 18 XER
Z 22 SE
Z 22 YH
10,4/10,7/–/– 10,1/ 9,9/ 9,7/– –/12,5/–/–
5,5/ 5,8/–/– 5,5/ 5,6/ 5,4/– –/ 6,3/–/–
7,3/ 7,6/–/– 7,2/ 7,2/ 7,0/– –/ 8,6/–/–
175/ 182/–/– 173/ 173/ 168/– –/ 206/–/–
–/11,4/–/13,3
–/ 6,2/–/ 6,5
–/ 8,1/–/ 9,0
–/ 194/–/ 216
10,3/10,3/–/11,3
6,0/ 5,9/–/ 6,1
7,6/ 7,5/–/ 8,0
182/ 180/–/ 192
Z 28 NET
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
7,4/–/–/–
4,7/–/–/–
5,7/–/–/–
154/–/–/–
7,4/–/–/ 9,4
4,7/–/–/ 5,3
5,7/–/–/ 6,8
154/–/–/184
9,8/–/–/10,2
5,2/–/–/ 5,3
6,9/–/–/ 7,1
186/–/–/ 192
Engine1)
Z 28 NEL
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
15,4/–/–/17,1 15,4/–/–/17,1 7,4/–/–/–
7,3/–/–/ 7,3 7,3/–/–/ 7,3 4,7/–/–/–
10,3/–/–/10,9 10,3/–/–/10,9 5,7/–/–/–
247/–/–/ 262 247/–/–/ 262 154/–/–/–
Z 19 DTL
Z 20 NET
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 235 mm)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
Z 18 XER
Z 22 SE
Z 22 YH
10,5/10,8/–/– 10,2/10,0/ 9,8/– –/12,6/–/–
5,6/ 5,9/–/– 5,6/ 5,7/ 5,5/– –/ 6,4/–/–
7,4/ 7,7/–/– 7,3/ 7,3/ 7,1/– –/ 8,7/–/–
178/ 185/–/– 175/ 175/170/– –/ 209/–/–
–/11,5/–/13,4
–/ 6,3/–/ 6,6
– / 8,2/–/ 9,1
– /197/–/ 218
10,4/10,4/–/11,4
6,1/ 6,0/–/ 6,2
7,7/ 7,6/–/ 8,1
185/ 182/–/ 194
Z 28 NET
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
7,5/–/–/–
4,8/–/–/–
5,8/–/–/–
157/–/–/–
7,5/–/–/ 9,5
4,8/–/–/ 5,4
5,8/–/–/ 6,9
157/–/–/186
9,9/–/–/10,3
5,3/–/–/ 5,4
7,0/–/–/ 7,2
189/–/–/ 194
Engine1)
Z 28 NEL
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
15,5/–/–/17,2 15,5/–/–/17,2 7,5/–/–/–
7,4/–/–/ 7,4 7,4/–/–/ 7,4 4,8/–/–/–
10,4/–/–/11,0 10,4/–/–/11,0 5,8/–/–/–
250/–/–/ 264 250/–/–/ 264 157/–/–/–
1)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Z 19 DTL
Z 20 NET
290
Technical Data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 SE
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
10,4/10,7/–/–
5,5/ 5,8/–/–
7,3/ 7,6/–/–
175/ 182/–/–
10,1/ 9,9/ 9,7/–
5,5/ 5,6/ 5,4/–
7,2/ 7,2/ 7,0/–
173/173/168/–
–/12,5/–/–
–/ 6,3/–/–
–/ 8,6/–/–
–/ 206/–/–
– /11,4/–/13,3
– / 6,2/–/ 6,5
– / 8,1/–/ 9,0
– / 194/–/ 216
Engine1)
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL
Z 28 NET
Z 28 NET VXR
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
10,3/10,3/–/11,3
6,0/ 5,9/–/ 6,1
7,6/ 7,5/–/ 8,0
182/ 180/–/ 192
15,4/–/–/17,1
7,3/–/–/ 7,3
10,3/–/–/10,9
247/–/–/ 262
15,4/–/–/17,1
7,3/–/–/ 7,3
10,3/–/–/10,9
247/–/–/ 262
15,4/–/–/2)
7,3/–/–/2)
10,3/–/–/2)
247/–/–/2)
Engine1)
Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
7,4/–/–/–
4,7/–/–/–
5,7/–/–/–
154/–/–/–
7,4/–/–/–
4,7/–/–/–
5,7/–/–/–
154/–/–/–
7,4/–/–/ 9,5
4,7/–/–/ 5,4
5,7/–/–/ 6,9
154/–/–/186
9,8/–/–/10,2
5,2/–/–/ 5,3
6,9/–/–/ 7,1
186/–/–/ 192
1)
2)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Values not available at time of printing.
Technical Data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 235 mm)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 SE
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
10,5/10,8/–/–
5,6/ 5,9/–/–
7,4/ 7,7/–/–
178/ 185/–/–
10,2/10,0/ 9,8/–
5,6/ 5,7/ 5,5/–
7,3/ 7,3/ 7,1/–
175/ 175/ 170/–
–/12,6/–/–
–/ 6,4/–/–
–/ 8,7/–/–
–/ 209/–/–
– /11,5/–/13,4
– / 6,3/–/ 6,6
– / 8,2/–/ 9,1
– / 197/–/ 218
Engine1)
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL
Z 28 NET
Z 28 NET VXR
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
10,4/10,4/–/11,4
6,1/ 6,0/–/ 6,2
7,7/ 7,6/–/ 8,1
185/ 182/–/ 194
15,5/–/–/17,2
7,4/–/–/ 7,4
10,4/–/–/ 11,0
250/–/–/ 264
15,5/–/–/17,2
7,4/–/–/ 7,4
10,4/–/–/11,0
250/–/–/ 264
15,4/–/–/2)
7,3/–/–/2)
10,3/–/–/2)
247/–/–/2)
Engine1)
Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
7,5/–/–/–
4,8/–/–/–
5,8/–/–/–
157/–/–/–
7,5/–/–/–
4,8/–/–/–
5,8/–/–/–
157/–/–/–
7,5/–/–/ 9,6
4,8/–/–/ 5,5
5,8/–/–/ 7,0
157/–/–/189
9,9/–/–/10,3
5,3/–/–/ 5,4
7,0/–/–/ 7,2
189/–/–/ 194
1)
2)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Values not available at time of printing.
291
292
Technical Data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
Engine1)
Z 28 NET
–/11,0/–/–
10,3/10,4/10,0/– –/12,7/–/– 10,6/10,6/–/11,5
–/ 6,1/–/–
5,9/ 6,1/ 5,7/– –/ 6,5/–/– 6,3/ 6,2/–/ 6,3
–/ 7,9/–/–
7,5/ 7,7/ 7,3/– –/ 8,8/–/– 7,9/ 7,8/–/ 8,2
–/ 190/–/–
180/ 185/ 175/– –/ 211/–/– 190/ 187/–/ 197
Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
15,5/–/–/17,4 15,5/–/–/2)
7,4/–/–/ 7,6 7,4/–/–/2)
10,4/–/–/11,2 10,4/–/–/2)
250/–/–/ 269 250/–/–/2)
Z 18 XER
7,5/–/–/–
4,8/–/–/–
5,8/–/–/–
157/–/–/–
Z 20 NET
7,5/–/–/–
4,8/–/–/–
5,8/–/–/–
157/–/–/–
Z 22 YH
7,5/–/–/ 9,6
4,8/–/–/ 5,5
5,8/–/–/ 7,0
157/–/–/189
Z 28 NEL
15,5/–/–/17,4
7,4/–/–/ 7,6
10,4/–/–/11,2
250/–/–/ 269
Z 30 DT
9,8/–/–/10,3
5,2/–/–/ 5,4
6,9/–/–/ 7,2
186/–/–/ 194
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), estate (tyre width up to 235 mm)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
Engine1)
Z 28 NET
–/11,1/–/–
10,4/10,5/10,1/– –/12,8/–/– 10,7/10,7/–/11,6
–/ 6,2/–/–
6,0/ 6,2/ 5,8/– –/ 6,6/–/– 6,4/ 6,3/–/ 6,4
–/ 8,0/–/–
7,6/ 7,8/ 7,4/– –/ 8,9/–/– 8,0/ 7,9/–/ 8,3
–/192/–/–
182/ 187/ 178/– –/ 214/–/– 192/ 190/–/ 199
Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic
transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
15,6/–/–/17,5 15,5/–/–/2)
7,5/–/–/ 7,7 7,4/–/–/2)
10,5/–/–/11,3 10,4/–/–/2)
252/–/–/ 271 250/–/–/2)
1)
2)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Values not available at time of printing.
Z 18 XER
7,6/–/–/–
4,9/–/–/–
5,9/–/–/–
159/–/–/–
Z 20 NET
7,6/–/–/–
4,9/–/–/–
5,9/–/–/–
159/–/–/–
Z 22 YH
7,6/–/–/ 9,7
4,9/–/–/ 5,6
5,9/–/–/ 7,1
159/–/–/192
Z 28 NEL
15,6/–/–/17,5
7,5/–/–/ 7,7
10,5/–/–/11,3
252/–/–/ 271
Z 30 DT
9,9/–/–/10,4
5,3/–/–/ 5,5
7,0/–/–/ 7,3
189/–/–/ 197
Technical Data
Weights, payload and roof load
The payload is the difference between the
permitted gross vehicle weight (see
identification plate, page 282) and the EC
kerb weight.
To calculate the kerb weight, enter the
data for your vehicle below:
z Kerb weight from
Table 1,
pages 294, 296
+.............. kg
z Additional weight of
equipment versions from
Table 2, page 297
+.............. kg
z Weight of heavy
accessories from Table 3,
page 298
+.............. kg
The total
=.............. kg
is the EC kerb weight.
Optional equipment and accessories
increase the kerb weight, which means that
the payload will also change slightly.
Pay attention to weight ranges in vehicle
documents and on identification plate.
293
The combined total of front and rear axle
loads must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight. For example, if the
front axle is bearing its maximum
permissible load, the rear axle can only
bear a load that is equal to the gross
vehicle weight minus the front axle load.
Roof load
The permitted roof load for the saloon is
90 kg, for the estate without roof railing it is
75 kg, and for the estate with roof railing it
is 100 kg. The roof load consists of the
combined weight of the roof rack and the
load.
When the caravan/trailer is coupled and
the towing vehicle fully loaded (including
all occupants), the permissible rear axle
load (see identification plate or vehicle
documents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If
the permissible rear axle load is exceeded,
a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)
applies. If national regulations specify a
lower maximum speed for vehicles towing
a caravan/trailer, this must be observed.
Driving hints – see page 186.
See the identification plate or vehicle
documents for permissible axle loads.
Roof rack, see page 220.
294
Technical Data
Weights (kg): Table 1, kerb weight1) , Saloon
Model
Vectra with
climate control
1)
2)
Engine2)
4-door
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Z 18 XE
1395
–
–
Z 18 XER
1395
1395
–
Z 20 NET
1505
–
–
Z 22 SE
1460
–
1490
Z 22 YH
1460
–
1490
Z 28 NEL
1565
–
1590
Z 28 NET
1565
–
1590
Z 19 DTL
1505
–
–
Z 19 DT
1505
–
–
Z 19 DTH
1503
–
1523
Z 30 DT
1635
–
1660
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Technical Data
Weights (kg): Table 1, kerb weight1) , Hatch
Model
Vectra with
climate control
1)
2)
Engine2)
5-door
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Z 18 XE
1393
–
–
Z 18 XER
1393
1393
–
Z 20 NET
1503
–
–
Z 22 SE
1475
–
1505
Z 22 YH
1475
–
1505
Z 28 NEL
1580
–
1605
Z 28 NET
1580
–
1605
Z 19 DTL
1503
–
–
Z 19 DT
1503
–
–
Z 19 DTH
1523
–
1548
Z 30 DT
1650
–
1675
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
295
296
Technical Data
Weights (kg): Table 1, Kerb weight1) , Estate
Model
Engine2)
Estate
Manual
transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Vectra with
climate control
Z 18 XE
1475
–
–
Z 18 XER
1475
1475
–
Z 20 NET
1570
–
–
Z 22 YH
1523
–
1553
1)
2)
Z 28 NEL
1613
–
1638
Z 28 NET
1613
–
1638
Z 19 DTL
1585
–
–
Z 19 DT
1585
–
–
Z 19 DTH
1600
–
1613
Z 30 DT
1685
–
1710
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Technical Data
297
Weights (kg): Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions
Saloon / Hatch
Engine1)
Z 18 XE,
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 SE
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL
Z 28 NET
Life
16
16
16
16
16
16
Exclusiv
32
32
32
32
32
32
Design/Elite
31
31
31
31
31
31
SRi
28
28
28
28
28
28
Engine1)
Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
Life
16
16
16
6
Exclusiv
32
32
32
22
Design/Elite
31
31
31
21
SRi
28
28
28
26
Engine1)
Z 18 XE,
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL
Z 28 NET
Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
Life
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
Exclusiv
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
20
Design/Elite
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
25
SRi
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
26
Estate
1)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
298
Technical Data
Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories
Saloon / Hatch
Accessories
Sun roof
Towing equipment
Weight
17
23
Accessories
Sun roof
Towing equipment
Weight
18
33
Estate
Technical Data
Tyres
Restrictions
Not all tyres available on the market
currently meet the structural requirements.
We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning
suitable tyre makes.
These tyres have undergone special tests
to establish their reliability, safety and
specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles.
Despite continuous market monitoring, we
are unable to assess these attributes for
other tyres, even if they have been granted
approval by the relevant authorities or in
some other form.
Further information – see page 214.
Winter tyres 3
Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and
235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter
tyres.
Only the winter tyres specified on page 306
may be used on vehicles factory-fitted with
235/35 R 19 tyres.
For Vectra VXR, tyres of size 225/45 R 17 on
a Vauxhall-approved alloy wheel with
designation 7x17, ET39 as well as tyres of
size 235/40 R 18 are permissible as winter
tyres.
If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. Use
of the spare wheel may alter vehicle
handling. Obtain a replacement for the
faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have
the wheel balanced and fitted to the
vehicle.
299
Depending on the version, the spare wheel
will be in the form of a temporary spare
wheel. The vehicle may handle differently if
a spare wheel has been fitted.
Further information – see page 219.
The spare wheel can be equipped with a
smaller tyre and a smaller rim1): the vehicle
may handle differently if the spare wheel
has been fitted.
Tyre chains 3
Replace defective tyre as soon as possible,
balance wheel and fit to vehicle.
Restrictions
Tyre chains may be used on the front
wheels only.
We recommend the use of Vauxhall-tested
fine-mesh tyre chains that add no more
than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the
inboard sides (including chain lock).
Tyre chains are not permitted on tyre sizes
115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18,
235/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19.
Further information – see page 219.
Wheels
Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.
On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare
wheel may have a steel rim.
Tyre pressure in bar/psi
The specified tyre pressures are valid for
cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure
resulting from extensive driving must not
be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on
the following pages apply to both summer
and winter tyres.
Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre
pressure for full load - see tables on
following pages.
Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure - see
tables on next page.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
attaching tyre pressure gauge – see
page 215.
Further information – see pages 214
to 219.
1)
Country-specific version: The spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
300
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Saloon / Hatch
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure
ECO1)
loaded with
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure
for full load
Engine 2)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 18 XE,
Z 18 XER
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16,
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,0/29
2,2/32
2,4/35
38/2,6
2,4/35
2,9/42
Z 20 NET
205/55 R 163)
2,4/35
2,4/35
–
–
2,5/36
3,0/44
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,3/33
2,3/33
2,6/38
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,9/42
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
2,3/33
2,3/33
–
–
2,4/35
2,9/42
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,2/32
2,2/32
2,5/36
2,5/36
2,3/33
2,8/41
T 115/70 R 164)
4,2/61
4,2/61
–
–
4,2/61
4,2/61
Z 22 SE,
Z 22 YH
all
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
1)
To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible.
2)
Sales designation, see pages 284, 285.
3)
Only permitted as winter tyres.
4)
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237.
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Saloon / Hatch
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Tyres
Z 28 NEL,
Z 28 NET
215/55 R 162)
2,4/35
2,4/35
2,6/38
3,1/45
172),
2)
215/50 R
225/45 R 17 ,
225/45 R 182)
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,8/41
2,3/33
215/55 R 163)
2,5/36
2,3/33
2,7/39
3,2/46
173),
173),
3)
215/50 R
225/45 R
225/45 R 18
2,7/39
2,4/35
2,9/42
3,4/49
235/35 R 19,
235/40 R 18
2,9/42
2,6/38
3,1/45
3,5/51
2,8/41
2,5/36
3,0/44
3,5/51
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
225/45 R 174)
all
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
for full load
Engine1)
Vectra VXR
1)
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
301
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
T 115/70 R 16
5)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Version with manual transmission.
Version with automatic transmission.
Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237.
302
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Saloon / Hatch
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure
loaded with
for full load
up to 3 people
Engine2)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 19 DTL,
Z 19 DTH
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
2,4/35
2,4/35
–
–
2,5/36
3,0/44
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,3/33
2,3/33
2,6/38
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,9/42
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
2,3/33
2,3/33
–
–
2,4/35
2,9/42
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,2/32
2,2/32
2,5/36
2,5/36
2,3/33
2,8/41
215/55 R 16,
2,5/36
2,3/33
–
–
2,7/39
3,2/46
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,6/38
2,4/35
–
–
2,7/39
3,2/46
2,7/39
2,4/35
–
–
2,8/41
3,3/48
4,2/61
4,2/61
–
–
4,2/61
4,2/61
Z 19 DT
Z 30 DT
225/45 R 17
all
3)
T 115/70 R 16
1)
To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible.
2)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
3)
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237.
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Estate
Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure
loaded with
for full load
up to 3 people
Engine2)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 18 XE,
Z 18 XER
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16,
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,0/29
2,2/32
2,4/35
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,9/42
Z 20 NET
205/55 R 163)
2,4/35
2,4/35
–
–
2,5/36
3,0/44
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,3/33
2,3/33
2,6/38
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,9/42
195/65 R153),
205/55 R 16
2,3/33
2,3/33
–
–
2,4/35
2,9/42
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,2/32
2,2/32
2,5/36
2,5/36
2,3/33
2,8/41
T 115/70 R 164)
4,2/61
4,2/61
–
–
4,2/61
4,2/61
Z 22 YH,
Z 22 SE
all
1)
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
1)
To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible.
2)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
3)
Only permitted as winter tyres.
4)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
303
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237.
304
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Estate
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 28 NEL,
Z 28 NET
215/55 R 162)
2,5/36
2,3/33
2,7/39
3,2/46
215/50 R 172),
225/45 R 172),
225/45 R 182)
2,7/39
2,4/35
2,9/42
3,4/49
215/55 R 163)
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,8/41
3,3/48
173),
3)
215/50 R
225/45 R 18
2,7/39
2,4/35
2,9/42
3,4/49
225/45 R 173)
2,8/41
2,5/36
3,0/44
3,5/51
235/35 R 19,
235/40 R 18
2,9/42
2,6/38
3,1/45
3,5/51
225/45 R 174)
2,8/41
2,5/36
3,0/44
3,5/51
T 115/70 R 165)
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
all
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
for full load
Engine1)
Vectra VXR
1)
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
Sales designation, see pages 284, 285.
Version with manual transmission.
Version with automatic transmission.
Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237.
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure
loaded with
for full load
up to 3 people
Front
Front
Rear
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 19 DTL, 195/65 R 15,
Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16
2,4/35
2,4/35
–
–
2,5/36
3,0/44
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,3/33
2,3/33
2,6/38
2,6/38
2,4/35
2,9/42
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
2,3/33
2,3/33
–
–
2,4/35
2,9/42
215/55 R 16,
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,2/32
2,2/32
2,5/36
2,5/36
2,3/33
2,8/41
215/55 R 16
2,5/36
2,3/33
–
–
2,7/39
3,2/46
215/50 R 17,
225/45 R 18
2,6/38
2,4/35
–
–
2,7/39
3,2/46
2,7/39
2,4/35
–
–
2,8/41
3,3/45
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
Estate
Engine2)
Z 19 DT
Z 30 DT
Tyres
225/45 R 17
all
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
305
3)
T 115/70 R 16
1)
To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible.
2)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
3)
For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237.
306
Technical Data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Saloon / Hatch / Estate
with 19-inch wheels
Tyre pressure
for load of
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure
for full load
Engine1)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 18 XE,
Z 18 XER,
Z 22 SE,
Z 22 YH
235/35 R 19
2,7/39
2,4/35
2,8/41
3,3/48
215/55 R
225/45 R 17 ,
205/50 R 172)
2,3/33
2,3/33
2,5/36
3,0/44
235/35 R 19
Z 20 NET,
Z 19 DTL,
Z 19 DTH
Z 28 NEL,
Z 28 NET
Z 30 DT
162),
2)
2,7/39
2,4/35
2,8/41
3,3/48
162),
2)
215/55 R
225/45 R 17
2,3/33
2,3/33
2,5/36
3,0/44
205/50 R 172)
2,7/39
2,4/35
2,8/41
3,3/48
235/35 R 19
2,9/42
2,6/38
3,1/45
3,5/51
215/55 R 162),
225/45 R 172)
2,8/41
2,5/36
3,0/44
3,5/51
205/50 R 172)
2,9/42
2,6/38
3,1/45
3,5/51
235/35 R 19
2,9/42
2,6/38
3,1/45
3,5/51
162),
2)
2,7/39
2,5/36
2,9/42
3,4/49
205/50 R 172)
2,9/42
2,6/38
3,1/45
3,5/51
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
4,2/61
215/55 R
225/45 R 17
all
T 115/70 R 16
3)
1)
Sales designation, see pages 284, 285.
2)
Only permitted as winter tyres.
3)
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237.
Technical Data
307
Electrical system
Battery
Voltage
12 Volt
Amp hours
55 Ah / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3
Battery for radio remote control of
central locking system
CR 20 32
Battery for remote control of
auxiliary heater/ventilation
AAA LR 06
308
Technical Data
Capacities
(approx. litre)
Engine1)
Z 18 XE
Z 18 XER
Z 20 NET
Z 22 SE
Z 22 YH
Z 28 NEL,
Z 28 NET
Fuel tank (nominal capacity)
Saloon / hatch
estate
61
60
61
60
61
60
61
60
61
60
61
60
4.25
4.5
6.0
4.75
5.0
6.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.75
1.0
1.0
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
Engine oil with filter change
between MIN and MAX
on dipstick
Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen
wash system
with headlight wash system
1)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
Technical Data
Capacities
(approx. litre)
Engine1)
Z 19 DTL
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Z 30 DT
Fuel tank (nominal capacity)
Saloon / hatch
estate
61
60
61
60
61
60
61
60
4,3
4,3
4,3
7,5
0,7
0,7
0,7
1,0
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
2.9
5.6
Engine oil with filter change
between MIN and MAX
on dipstick
Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen
wash system
with headlight wash system
1)
Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.
309
310
Technical Data
Dimensions
(approx. mm)
Saloon / Hatch
Estate
Saloon VXR
Estate VXR
Overall length
4611
4839
4642
4870
Overall width
1798
1798
1798
1798
Width with two exterior mirrors
2036
2036
2036
2036
Overall height
1460
1500
1460
1500
Length of luggage compartment floor
1047
1176
1047
1176
Luggage compartment width
maximum
between the wheel arches
1396
972
1079
1060
1396
972
1079
1060
Height of luggage compartment
opening
6141)
767
614
767
Wheelbase
2700
2830
2700
2830
11.50
11.50
11.50
11.50
Turning circle diameter
1)
2)
4-door saloon 324 mm.
In metres.
2)
Technical Data
Installation dimensions of
trailer towing equipment
with removable coupling ball
bar 3,
Saloon / hatch
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimension
mm
A
334
B
1061
C
492.5
D
486.5
E
218
F
495
G
492.5
H
201
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
retrofitting of towing equipment to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
311
312
Technical Data
Installation dimensions of
trailer towing equipment
with pivoting coupling ball bar 3,
Estate
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimension
mm
A
396.5
B
157.5
C
386
D
74
E
630
F
590
G
491
H
486
I
480
J
379.5
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
retrofitting of towing equipment to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Technical Data
313
314
Index
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ............... 212
Accessories ............................ 124, 127, 234
Accessory socket .............................89, 101
Adaptive brake light ............................. 210
Adaptive Forward Lighting .................. 131
Bulb replacement ............................... 257
Driving abroad ................................... 135
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
Bulb replacement ............................... 257
Driving abroad ................................... 135
Air conditioning system ......................... 142
Air intake ................................................ 168
Air outlet ................................................. 168
Air quality sensor ................................... 159
Air recirculation system ........ 150, 155, 163
Air vents ................................................. 144
Airbags ................................................... 112
Alarm ........................................................ 76
Alarm system ........................................... 74
Alternator ................................................. 35
Antenna .................................................... 59
Anti-corrosion service ............................ 267
Antifreeze ............................................... 270
Antifreeze protection ....................270, 275
Anti-knock quality of fuel ...................... 190
Octane number ..........................284, 285
Anti-theft locking system ........................ 66
Anti-theft protection ............................... 22
Aquaplaning .......................................... 218
Armrest ..................................................... 84
Ashtray ........................................... 102, 134
Automatic air recirculation mode ........ 163
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror .. 126
Automatic transmission .................. 20, 178
Automatic mode ................................ 179
Driving programme ........................... 181
Fault .................................................... 184
Interruption of power supply ............ 185
Kickdown ............................................ 182
Manual mode ..................................... 180
Selector lever ........................20, 179, 180
Selector lever lock .............................. 179
Winter programme ............................ 182
Automatic wiping .................................... 17
Auxiliary heating ................................... 165
Programming ..................................... 166
Remote control .................................. 167
B
Battery ....................................187, 276, 307
Interruption of
power supply ......................138, 177, 185
Battery discharge protection ............... 134
Before starting off .................21, 22, 23, 24
Belt tensioners ....................................... 107
Bleeding, diesel fuel system .................. 229
Board information display ...................... 42
Bonnet ...................................................... 80
Boot, see Luggage compartment .... 70, 94
Brake assist ............................................ 210
Brake light .............................................. 210
Brake system ............................................ 35
Brakes ..................................................... 210
ABS ..................................................... 212
Brake assist ........................................ 210
Brake fluid .......................................... 272
Brake lights ........................................ 258
Brake servo unit ................................. 186
Foot brake .................................. 210, 211
Hand brake ........................................ 211
Bulb replacement .................................. 252
Bulbs ............................................... 127, 252
C
Capacities .............................................. 308
Car Pass ......................................................2
Caravan/trailer towing .................. 186, 220
Care ........................................................ 278
Catalytic converter ................193, 197, 229
CDC (Continuous Damping Control) ... 200
Central locking system ............................ 66
Centre console lighting ......................... 134
Changing the battery
Radio remote control .......... 65, 167, 307
Changing tyre/wheel type .................... 214
Changing wheels ................................... 238
Chassis number, see vehicle identification
number ................................................. 283
Check control ..................................... 28, 58
Child restraint system ................... 124, 127
Child safety locks ............................ 77, 137
Cigarette lighter ............................ 101, 134
Climate control ...................................... 142
Clutch operation .................................... 187
CO2 emissions ....................................... 287
Code numbers ............................................2
Index
Cold start ................................................ 187
Colour information display ..................... 42
Continuous Damping Control ............... 200
Continuous Damping Control (CDC) .... 200
Contrast .................................................... 53
Control indicator
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 213
Airbag ................................................. 117
Engine electronics .............................. 196
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .... 198
Exhaust ............................................... 195
Immobiliser ........................................... 63
Parking distance sensor ............131, 205
Tyre pressure monitoring system ..... 209
Control indicators ..............................10, 34
Adaptive Forward Lighting .........38, 131
Belt tensioners .................................... 108
Brake system ...................................... 212
Cruise control ..................................... 202
IDS+ ..................................................... 201
Cool box ................................................... 90
Coolant ................................................... 270
Coolant level .......................................... 271
Coolant temperature display ................. 41
Coolant thermometer .............................. 41
Cooled glove compartment .................. 146
Cooling ...........................................151, 156
Correcting time ..................................46, 52
Coupling socket load ............................. 226
Courtesy light ......................................... 133
Courtesy lights
Bulb replacement ............................... 262
Cruise control ......................................... 202
Curtain airbags ...................................... 116
Curve lighting .................................. 32, 131
D
Dashboard, see Instrument panel ........... 8
Data .................................................. 62, 282
Date .................................................... 44, 47
Daytime running lights .......................... 128
Decommissioning .................................. 277
Demisting and defrosting
Windows ............................................. 149
With climate control system ............. 161
With air conditioning system .... 152, 157
Diesel fuel filter ...................................... 270
Diesel fuel system .......................... 229, 270
Diesel particle filter ......... 37, 145, 187, 197
Dimensions ............................................. 310
Dipped beam ................................... 14, 128
Bulb replacement ...................... 253, 255
Display ........................................39, 42, 179
Display mode ........................................... 54
Door locks ........................................ 62, 281
Doors ........................................................ 36
Door-to-door illumination ..................... 132
Drink holders .......................................... 105
Driver’s seat with climate control ......... 146
Driving abroad ......................190, 264, 265
Headlights .......................................... 135
Toll system ........................................... 61
Driving hints ........................................... 186
315
E
Easytronic ........................................ 19, 170
Driving programmes ......................... 173
Fault ................................................... 176
Interruption of power supply ............ 177
Kickdown ............................................ 174
Selector lever ....................................... 19
Starting off ......................................... 172
Winter programme ............................ 174
Economical driving ........................ 186, 188
Electric seat adjustment ......................... 84
Electric sun roof ..................................... 139
Electric windows .................................... 136
Electrical system ....................246, 276, 307
Electro-hydraulic
power assisted steering .......... 11, 37, 186
Electro-hydraulic power-assisted steering
fluid ..................................................... 283
Electronic components .......................... 276
Electronic immobiliser ............................. 63
Electronic Stability Program ................. 198
Engine code ...........................283, 284, 285
Engine control indicator ....................... 196
Engine oil ............................................... 268
Engine oil change .................................. 269
Engine oil consumption ........................ 268
Engine oil filter ....................................... 269
Engine oil level ................................. 38, 268
Engine oil pressure .................................. 34
Engine speed ......................................... 187
Engine wash ........................................... 281
Environmental protection ............. 269, 278
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ....... 198
316
Index
Exhaust control indicator ...................... 195
Exhaust gases ........................................ 196
Exhaust system ...................................... 196
Exterior mirrors ...........................6, 126, 145
F
Fan ......................................... 147, 154, 267
Filling station
Capacities ...................................308, 309
Engine oil level ................................... 268
Fuel .................................... 190, 284, 285
Ignition key ............................................. 2
Opening the bonnet ............................ 80
Tyre pressure ..............................189, 299
Vehicle data ....................................... 283
Windscreen wash system .................. 275
First-aid kit, ....................................127, 234
Flat tyre .................................................. 242
FlexOrganizer .......................................... 98
Fog lights ................................................ 130
Bulb replacement ............................... 258
Fog tail light ........................................... 130
Bulb replacement ............................... 258
Foot brake ......................................210, 211
Front passenger airbag ........................ 112
Fuel ................................ 190, 191, 284, 285
Fuel consumption ................. 188, 190, 287
Fuel filter ................................................. 270
Fuel gauge ............................................... 41
Fuel level ................................................... 41
Fuel system, diesel ................................. 229
Fuses ....................................................... 246
G
Generator, see Alternator ....................... 35
Genuine Vauxhall
Parts and Accessories ........................... 24
Glove compartment .............................. 103
Glove compartment lighting ................ 134
Bulb replacement .............................. 263
Graphical information display ............... 42
Gross vehicle weight .............................. 293
Gross vehicle weight rating .................. 293
H
Halogen headlight system ................... 253
Bulb replacement .............................. 253
Driving abroad ................................... 135
Hand brake ................................21, 22, 211
Hazard warning lights ............................ 16
Head restraints ......................6, 27, 82, 127
Headlamp wash system ......................... 17
Headlight flash ........................................ 15
Headlight range adjustment ........ 129, 252
Headlight switch ......................14, 128, 129
Headlight wash system ......................... 275
Headlights ................................................ 14
Daytime running lights ...................... 128
Driving abroad ................................... 135
Fog lights ............................................ 130
Reversing lights .................................. 130
Warning device .................................... 22
Heated exterior mirrors ................... 18, 145
Heated front seats ................................ 145
Heated rear seats .................................. 145
Heated rear window ....................... 18, 145
Heating ..................................142, 148, 156
Seats ................................................... 145
With climate control system ............. 160
With air conditioning system .... 152, 157
Height adjustment
seat belts ............................................ 109
Steering wheel ..................................... 14
High-pressure cleaners .........223, 280, 281
Horn .......................................................... 16
I
Identification plate ................................ 282
IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) . 198, 200
Ignition logic ...................................... 47, 54
Ignition switch .............................................7
Ignition system .............................. 267, 276
Immobiliser .............................................. 63
Information display ................................. 42
Infotainment system ............................... 60
Inspection system .................................. 266
Instrument display .................................. 40
Instrument illumination ......................... 133
Bulb replacement .............................. 263
Instrument panel ........................................8
Instruments ........................................ 34, 40
Interactive Driving System (IDS+) . 198, 200
Interior mirror ..............................................6
Universal remote control .................... 77
Interruption of power supply .... 56, 59, 138
Easytronic ........................................... 177
Electric windows ................................ 138
Selector lever lock .............................. 185
ISOFIX .................................................... 123
Index
J
Jack ......................................................... 238
Jump leads ............................................. 230
K
Key
extending ............................................. 62
ignition lock ................................7, 21, 63
Locking doors ....................................... 66
Remove ................................................. 22
Starting the engine ....................7, 21, 63
Key numbers .............................................. 2
Keys .......................................................... 62
L
Language selection ...........................47, 52
Lashing eyes ............................................ 98
Leather trim ........................................... 280
Level control system .............................. 206
Light switch .............................................. 14
Lighting ......................................14, 35, 128
Driving abroad ................................... 135
Loading .................................................. 225
Locking doors ...................................... 2, 66
Locking from the inside ........................... 67
Locks ....................................................... 281
Lubricants ......................................268, 283
Luggage compartment
Bulb replacement .............................. 263
Extension .............................................. 94
FlexOrganizer ...................................... 98
Lashing eyes ........................................ 98
Lighting .............................................. 134
Loading ...................................... 225, 293
Locking ................................................. 70
Safety net ............................................. 96
Luggage compartment cover ................ 95
Lumbar support ................................... 4, 85
M
Main beam ....................................... 14, 128
Bulb replacement ...................... 254, 256
Control indicator .................................. 36
Maintenance .................................... 24, 266
Air conditioning system ..................... 169
Antifreeze protection ........................ 270
Brake fluid .......................................... 272
Brakes ................................................. 210
Catalytic converter ............................ 197
Engine oil .................................... 268, 269
Fuel consumption .............................. 189
Tyre pressure ...................................... 215
Tyres ................................................... 217
Windscreen wiper .............................. 273
Manual transmission ............................... 19
Mirrors ................................................ 6, 126
Misted windows .......................18, 149, 161
Mobile telephone ..................................... 61
Motorway lighting ........................... 32, 131
Muffler, see Exhaust system ................. 196
317
N
Number plate lighting .......................... 261
Number plate lights
Bulb replacement .............................. 261
Number plates ....................................... 277
O
Octane numbers ....................190, 284, 285
Odometer ................................................. 40
Oil change ............................................. 269
Oil consumption .................................... 268
Oil filter change ..................................... 269
Oil level ................................................... 268
Oil pressure .............................................. 34
Oils .......................................................... 268
Operating temperature ........................ 187
Outside temperature gauge .................. 43
Overrun .......................................... 187, 189
P
Paintwork damage ............................... 280
Parking ............................................. 22, 204
Parking distance sensor ........................ 204
Parking lights ................................... 14, 132
Bulb replacement .............................. 257
Parking the vehicle .................................. 22
Parts ................................................. 24, 127
Pedals ..................................................... 187
Performance .......................................... 287
Petrol ......................................190, 284, 285
Pinking .................................................... 190
Pollen filter ............................................. 168
Position memory ............................ 6, 85, 86
318
Index
Power assisted steering, see electro-hydraulic power assisted steering .......... 186
Preheating ................................................ 37
Pushing, towing ..................................... 229
Q
Quickheat .......................................148, 156
R
Radio ........................................................ 59
Radio equipment (CB) ............................. 61
Radio reception ....................................... 59
Radio remote control
Auxiliary heating ................................ 167
Central locking system ........................ 64
Universal remote control ..................... 77
Rain sensor .............. 17, 138, 140, 273, 279
Reading lights ................................133, 134
Rear light cluster .................................... 128
Bulb replacement ............................... 258
Rear window wash system ......17, 275, 279
Refuelling ................................................ 191
Remote control
Auxiliary heating ................................ 167
Central locking system ........................ 64
Steering wheel ................................29, 60
Universal remote control ..................... 77
Replacement keys ................................... 62
Reversible carpet ..................................... 98
Reversing lights
Bulb replacement ............................... 258
Roof load ............................... 100, 186, 189
Roof rack ........................................189, 220
Roof racks ......................................189, 220
Running-in .............................................. 186
Brakes ................................................. 210
S
Safeguard against
unauthorised use ........................... 2, 7, 23
Safety ..................................................... 106
Safety accessories ......................... 124, 234
Safety net ................................................. 96
Safety systems ....................................... 106
Saving energy ........................................ 188
Seat adjustment .................................. 3, 84
Seat belts ...............................106, 109, 280
Seat height adjustment ............................ 4
Seat occupancy recognition ................. 118
Seat position ............................................ 81
Seats ....................................................... 3, 4
Extending the luggage compartment 94
heated ................................................ 145
With climate control .......................... 146
Selector lever .................................. 171, 179
Selector lever lock ............................ 20, 179
Interruption of power supply ............ 185
Self-diagnosis ........................108, 117, 213
Self-help ................................................. 229
Automatic transmission .................... 185
Central locking system ........................ 69
Electric sun roof ................................. 141
Electric windows ................................. 138
Information display ............................. 44
Radio remote control .......................... 65
Service Booklet ........................................ 24
Service interval display ......................... 266
Service work ..................................... 24, 266
Side airbags ........................................... 114
Signal system ........................................... 15
Spare keys ................................................ 62
Spare wheel ................................... 236, 238
Speed ............................................. 188, 189
Fuel consumption ...................... 188, 189
Speedometer ........................................... 40
Sport mode ...................................... 36, 200
Starter switch ................................. 7, 21, 63
Starting the engine .......7, 21, 63, 171, 229
Self-help ............................................. 229
Steam-jet cleaners ................223, 280, 281
Steering column lock ........................... 7, 22
Steering wheel adjustment ..................... 14
Steering wheel remote control ......... 29, 60
Stowage compartments ......... 83, 103, 104
Sun blind ................................................ 141
Sun roof .................................................. 139
Sun shade ...................................... 140, 141
System settings .................................. 46, 51
T
Tables ................................................. 30, 91
Tachometer ............................................. 40
Tail lights ................................................ 128
Bulb replacement .............................. 258
Tailgate .................................................... 70
Tank
Fuel gauge ........................................... 41
Technical data ...................................... 282
Telephone, see Mobile telephone .......... 61
Temperature regulation ............... 147, 160
Tempomat, see cruise control .............. 202
Temporary spare wheel ................ 219, 237
Index
The first 600 miles / 1000 km ................ 186
Thigh support ...................................... 5, 85
Tightening torque ..........................242, 299
Time ....................................................44, 47
Toll systems .............................................. 61
Tools ....................................................... 238
Towing .................................................... 232
Towing equipment ................................ 221
Towing eye .....................................232, 233
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) .................. 226
Transmission display ............................. 170
Transmission, automatic .................20, 178
Automatic mode ................................ 179
Driving programme ........................... 181
Fault .................................................... 184
Interruption of power supply ............ 185
Kickdown ............................................ 182
Selector lever ..............................179, 180
Selector lever lock .............................. 179
Winter programme ............................ 182
Transmission, Easytronic ....................... 170
Driving programmes .......................... 173
fault ..................................................... 176
Interruption of power supply ............ 177
Kickdown ............................................ 174
Selector lever ................................19, 172
Winter programme ............................ 174
Transmission, manual ............................. 19
Travel Assistant .................................30, 87
Tread depth ........................................... 217
Trip computer ..............................28, 48, 54
Trip odometer .......................................... 40
Triple information display ....................... 42
TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) .................. 226
Turn lighting .................................... 32, 131
Turn signal lights ..................................... 15
Turn signals
Bulb replacement .............................. 258
Twin Audio ......................................... 29, 60
Tyre chains ..................................... 219, 299
Tyre condition ........................................ 217
Tyre pressure .........................206, 215, 299
Tyre pressure monitoring system ......... 206
Tyre repair kit ........................................ 242
U
Units of measure ............................... 47, 53
Unleaded fuel ............... 190, 193, 284, 285
Used oil ................................................... 269
V
Valve cap key ........................................ 215
Vauxhall alarm system ........................... 74
Vauxhall Service .............................. 24, 264
Vehicle care ........................................... 278
Vehicle decommissioning ..................... 277
Vehicle identification number .............. 283
Vehicle keys, see Keys ............................. 62
Vehicle recommissioning ...................... 277
Ventilation ..................... 142, 148, 155, 162
W
Warning buzzers ..................................... 22
Warning messages ...................... 45, 50, 51
Warning triangle, .................................. 127
Wash fluid reservoir,
windscreen wash system ..................... 275
Wheels .................................................... 214
319
Wheels, tyres .......................................... 214
Windows
Demisting and defrosting .. 18, 149, 152,
157, ..................................................... 161
Windscreen wash system ........................ 17
Antifreeze protection ........................ 275
Wash fluid reservoir ........................... 275
Windscreen washer system
Capacities .................................. 308, 309
Windscreen wiper ............................ 16, 273
Winter mode
Starting-off aid .................................. 174
Winter operation
Battery ................................................ 187
Coolant, antifreeze ............................ 270
Fuel consumption .............................. 189
Fuel for diesel engines ...................... 191
Heating ..............................142, 152, 157
Locks .................................................. 281
Tyre chains ................................. 219, 299
Window demisting and defrosting ... 149
Windscreen wash system, antifreeze protection ................................................ 275
Winter programme ................................ 174
Winter tyres .................................... 219, 299
X
Xenon headlight system ....................... 255
Bulb replacement .............................. 255
Driving abroad .................................. 135
320
Index